1. business and industrial
2. construction

NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
RESTROOM PAVILION
FOR
SARASOTA COUNTY GOVERNMENT
SARASOTA, FLORIDA
Appendix A: Project NOA’s/ FL Approvals
10364CS
ISSUED: MARCH 1, 2010
This page left intentionally blank
This page left intentionally blank
SECTION 10
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
• Storage Pavilion
This page left intentionally blank
__________________________________________________________________________________
TABLE OF CONTENTS – STORAGE BUILDING
SECTION
PAGE
VOLUME I
General Requirements
Division 1
Summary of Work
011100
Substitution Procedures
012500
Contract Modification Procedures
012600
Payment Procedures
012900
Project Coordination
013113
Project Meetings
013119
Construction Progress Documentation
013200
Submittal Procedures
013300
Reference Standards
014219
Quality Control
014500
Construction Facilities
015200
Product Requirements
016000
Field Engineering
017123
Execution
017300
Cutting and Patching
017329
Construction Waste Management and Disposal
017419
Closeout Procedures
017700
Operation and Management Data
017823
Warranties
017836
Project Record Documents
Division 2
Selective Site Demolition
Division 3
Cast In Place Concrete
Division 4
017839
Site Work
024113
Concrete
033000
Masonry
Concrete Unit Masonry
Division 5
042200
Metals
Metal Fabrications
055000
Woods and Plastics
Division 6
Not Used
Division 7
Thermal and Moisture Protection
_______________________________________________________________________________________
9 July 2010
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page i
This page left intentionally blank
__________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION
PAGE
Fluid Applied Roofing
075600
Flashing and Sheet Metal
076000
Joint Sealants
079200
Doors and Windows
Division 8
Metal Doors and Frames
081100
Sectional Doors
083613
Door Hardware
087100
Louvers and Vents
089000
Foundation Flood Vents
089543
Finishes
Division 9
Portland Cement Plastering
092400
Painting
099100
Division 10
Specialties
Signage
101400
Wall and Door Protection
102600
Division 11
Equipment
Not Used
Division 12
Furnishings
Not Used
Division 13
Special Construction
Not Used
Division 14
Conveying Systems
Not Used
VOLUME II
Plumbing
Division 22
Not Used
Division 23
HVAC
Not Used
Electrical
Division 26
Common Work Results for Electrical
Construction
260500
Grounding & Bonding for Electrical Systems
260526
Hangers & Supports for Electrical Systems
260529
Raceway & Boxes for Electrical Systems
260533
_______________________________________________________________________________________
9 July 2010
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page ii
This page left intentionally blank
__________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION
PAGE
Identification for Electrical Systems
260553
Lighting Control Devices
260923
Panelboards
262416
Wiring devices
262726
Fuses
262813
Surge Protective Devices
264313
Interior Lighting
265100
Exterior Lighting
265600
Division 31
Earthwork
Clearing and Grubbing
311100
Grading
312200
Excavation & Fill
312300
Dewatering
312319
Erosion and Sedimentation Controls
312500
Stormwater Pollution Prevention/NPDES
Requirements
318000
Division 32
Exterior
Improvements
Base Courses
321100
Subbase Courses
321116
Fences and Gates
323100
Paving
324000
Planting
329000
Division 33
Utilities
Pipe Removal and Abandonment
Division 34
Transportation
Maintenance of Traffic
Appendix A
339000
349000
Project NOA’s/ FL Approvals
_______________________________________________________________________________________
9 July 2010
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page iii
This page left intentionally blank
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
SECTION 011100
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Project Identification: Project consists of the replacement of an existing restroom facility at North Jetty
Beach Park with a new storage pavilion.
1.
2.
Project Location: North Jetty Beach Park, 1000 Casey Key Road, Nokomis, Florida.
Owner: Sarasota County
B.
Architect Identification: The Contract Documents, dated 03/01/2010, were prepared for Project by
TOTeMS, Inc. – 2168 Main Street, Sarasota, Florida 34237.
C.
Project Coordinator: Kim Humphrey.
1.03
A.
CONTRACT
Project will be constructed under a general construction contract, with one bid number issued for:
1.
1.04
A.
1.05
A.
1.06
North Jetty Beach Park: New Storage Pavilion.
WORK SEQUENCE
The Work shall be conducted in one phase as illustrated in the Construction Documents.
USE OF PREMISES
General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations, including use of
Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to
perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. Contractor staging, storage, and job
trailer location shall be finalized at a Pre-Construction conference and as required by authority having
jurisdiction. Keep driveways and entrances clear at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or
storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize requirements for on site storage of materials. No
work shall commence before 7:00 a.m. or proceed after 7:00 p.m. on any day.
PARTIAL OWNER OCCUPANCY
SUMMARY OF WORK
011100 - 1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
A.
1.07
A.
The Owner reserves the right to occupy, and place and install equipment, in completed areas prior to
Substantial Completion provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work.
Placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of total Work.
1.
A Certificate of Substantial Completion will be executed by the Architect for the Work occupied
prior to Owner occupancy after the Construction Manager (Contractor) punch list has been
reviewed and clarified by the Architect and Owner.
2.
Obtain a Certificate of Completion from local building officials prior to Owner occupancy.
3.
Prior to partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational.
Required inspections and tests shall be fully operational, and Owner shall be trained in the use and
maintenance of facility systems by the Contractor. Required inspections and tests shall have been
successfully completed. Upon occupancy, the Contractor will provide operation and maintenance
of mechanical and electrical systems during a 1 year warranty period. Owner will take over O&M
after the 1-year period.
SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 2004
CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.
1.
B.
03/01/2010
Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing
in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence. Consult the
table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of
sections in the Contract Documents.
Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the
intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These
conventions are as follows:
1.
2.
Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is
abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not
stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and
plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract
Documents indicates.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements
expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative
or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that
must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted.
a.
The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are
implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
END OF SECTION
SUMMARY OF WORK
011100 - 2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
SECTION 012500
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 and other Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for substitutions
made after award of the Contract.
B.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
2.
1.03
Division 1 Section "Reference Standards" specifies the applicability of industry standards to
products specified.
Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" specifies requirements for submitting the Contractor's
Construction Schedule and the Submittal Schedule.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Definitions in this Article do not change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the Contract
Documents.
B.
Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by the
Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are considered to be requests
for substitutions. The following are not considered to be requests for substitutions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.04
A.
Substitutions requested during the bidding period, and accepted by Addendum prior to award of
the Contract, are included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to requirements specified
in this Section for substitutions.
Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect.
Specified options of products and construction methods included in the Contract Documents.
The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by
governing authorities.
SUBMITTALS
Substitution Request Submittal: The Architect will consider requests for substitution when received after
commencement of the Work.
1.
2.
3.
Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit requests in the form and
according to procedures required for change-order proposals. Use form provided at end of this section.
Identify the product or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request.
Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers.
Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and
the following information, as appropriate:
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
012500-1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
4.
07/09/2010
Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts
of the Work and to construction performed by the Owner and separate contractors, that will
be necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution.
A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the
Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements, such as performance, weight,
size, durability, and visual effect.
Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
Samples, where applicable or requested.
A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's Construction Schedule
compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the
proposed substitution on overall Contract Time.
Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum.
The Contractor's certification that the proposed substitution conforms to requirements in
the Contract Documents in every respect and is appropriate for the applications indicated.
The Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately.
Architect's Action:
If necessary, the Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution. The
Architect will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the substitution within 7 days of
receipt of the request, or one week of receipt of additional information or documentation,
whichever is later. Acceptance will be formalized in the form of a change order.
a.
Use the product specified if the Architect cannot make a decision on the use of a proposed
substitute within the time allocated.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
SUBSTITUTIONS
Conditions: The Architect will receive and consider the Contractor's request for substitution when one or
more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect. If the following conditions
are not satisfied, the Architect will return the requests without action except to record noncompliance
with these requirements.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Extensive revisions to the Contract Documents are not required.
Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of the Contract Documents.
The request is timely, fully documented, and properly submitted.
The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time.
The Architect will not consider the request if the product or method cannot be provided as a result
of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly.
The request is directly related to an "or-equal" clause or similar language in the Contract
Documents.
The requested substitution offers the Owner a substantial advantage, in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities the Owner must
assume. The Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to the Architect for
redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the Owner, and similar
considerations.
The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing
authority, and the requested substitution can be approved.
The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible
with other materials and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the
incompatibility.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
012500-2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
9.
10.
11.
B.
07/09/2010
The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials and
where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated.
The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the
Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provides the
required warranty.
Where a proposed substitution involves more than one prime contractor, each contractor shall
cooperate with the other contractors involved to coordinate the Work, provide uniformity and
consistency, and assure compatibility of products.
The Contractor's submittal and the Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples
for construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents do not constitute an acceptable or
valid request for substitution, nor do they constitute approval.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
012500-3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
Project:
To:
Re:
Specification Title:
Section:
Substitution Request Number:
From:
Date:
.
.
.
Description:
Article/Paragraph:
Page:
Proposed Substitution:
Manufacturer:
Trade Name:
.
.
Address:
.
.
.
Phone:
Model No.
Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, and performance and test data adequate for
evaluation of the request: applicable portions of the data are clearly identified.
Attached data also includes a description of changes to the Contract Documents that the proposed substitutions will
require for its proper installation.
The Undersigned certifies:
1. Has investigated proposed Product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified
product.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified Product.
3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be
complete with no additional cost to Owner.
4. Waive claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent.
5. Will reimburse Owner and Architect/Engineer for review or redesign services associated with substitution.
Submitted By:
Signed By:
Firm:
Address:
Telephone:
.
.
.
.
.
Fax:
A/E’s REVIEW AND ACTION
Submission approved - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01300.
Submission approved as noted - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01300.
Submission rejected - Use specified materials.
Submission request received too late - Use specified materials.
Signed by:
Supporting Data Attached:
Date:
Drawings
Other
Product Data
.
Samples
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
012500-4
Tests
Reports
.
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
SECTION 012600
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 and other Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
A.
SUMMARY
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing contract
modifications.
1.
B.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
2.
3.
1.03
A.
1.04
A.
Multiple Prime Contracts: Provisions of this Section apply to the work of each prime contractor.
Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for requirements for the Contractor's Construction
Schedule.
Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for administrative procedures governing Applications for
Payment.
Division 1 Section "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for
substitutions made after award of the Contract.
CHANGES IN THE WORK
The Architect may periodically issue supplemental instructions authorizing changes in the Work when RFI
responses and executed proposal requests require further clarification.
PROPOSAL REQUESTS, CONTRACTOR-INTIATED PROPOSALS INCLUDING INTERIM FIELD
CHANGE AUTHORIZATIONS, CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES, AND CHANGE ORDERS
Proposal Requests: The Contractor will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that
will require adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time for review and approval by Owner prior to
Contractor preparation of a Change Order. If necessary, the description will include supplemental pricing
and labor costs and or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1.
2.
Proposal requests received by the Architect and Owner are for information only. Do not consider
them as an instruction either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
Owner shall, within 7 days of receipt of a proposal request, request a Change Order to be prepared
by the Contractor for consideration and approval by the Board of County Commissioners.
a.
b.
c.
B.
Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the total amount of
purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.
Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work will have on the
Contract Time.
Contractor-Initiated Proposals: When latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract,
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
012600-1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
the Contractor may propose changes by submitting an Interim Field Change Authorization (IFCA) for
approval by the Owner and Architect. IFCA’s shall be logged sequentially by the Contractor and listed in
each Application for Payment, noting the percentage completed and with applicable retainage calculated.
Interim Field Change Authorizations are not Change Orders. They are for elements added or removed to
the Work that fall within the contracted Owner’s Contingency amount. At the completion of the Work, any
unused contingency funds will remain with the Contract and not be paid out as part of any final payment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work.
Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change
on the Contract Sum and Contract Time.
Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the total amount of purchases to
be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.
Comply with requirements in Section "Substitutions" if the proposed change requires substitution of
one product or system for a product or system specified.
IFCA’s may accompany RFI’s at the Contractor’s option if an RFI contains a Contractor
recommended solution.
C.
Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Change Order Proposal Requests.
D.
IFCA Form: Format similar to AIA Documents G709.
1.05
CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A.
Construction Change Directive: When the Owner and the Contractor disagree on the terms of a Proposal
Request, the Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Form G714. The Construction
Change Directive instructs the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion
in a Change Order.
1.
B.
Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction Change Directive.
1.
1.06
The Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of the change in the Work. It
also designates the method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or Contract
Time.
After completion of the change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to
substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. Per Article II, Contract Price, of the Construction Contract; The contract price includes a 5% contingency
amount for change orders that may be authorized at the discretion of the Administrative Agent. Upon full
use of the 5% contracted Contingency, and the Owner's acceptance of subsequent Proposal Request(s), the
Contractor shall prepare a Change Order for signatures of the Owner and the Contractor on AIA Form
G701. Said change order may be implemented after Board of County Commissioners approval. Prior to full
use of the Contingency amount, Contractor shall use the Internal Field Change Agreement (IFCA) process.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 012600
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
012600-2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
SECTION 012900
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 and other Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing each prime contractor's
Applications for Payment.
1.
B.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section.
1.
1.03
A.
Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with the Owner's Construction
Schedule, Submittal Schedule, and List of Prime Contracts.
Schedules: The Owner's Construction Schedule and Submittal Schedule are specified in
Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures."
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
Coordination: Each prime Contractor shall coordinate preparation of its Schedule of Values for its part
of the Work with preparation of the Owners' Construction Schedule and Supplementary Conditions
Article 9.2.
1.
Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules and
forms, including:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
Owner's Construction Schedule.
Application for Payment forms, including Continuation Sheets.
List of subcontractors.
List of products.
List of principal suppliers and fabricators.
Schedule of submittals.
Submit the Schedule of Values to the Architect at the earliest possible date but no later than 10
days after execution of Contract.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
012900-1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
B.
Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish the format for the
Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1.
Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Project name and location.
Name of the Architect.
Project number.
Contractor's name and address.
Date of submittal.
Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following
for each item listed:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Related Specification Section or Division.
Description of Work.
Name of prime contractor.
Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
Name of supplier.
Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
Dollar value.
1)
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Percentage of Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100
percent.
Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation of
Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of
contents. Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line items.
Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract Sum.
Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored,
but not yet installed.
Provide separate line items on the Schedule of Values for initial cost of the materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
Unit-Cost Allowances: Show the line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit
cost, multiplied by the measured quantity. Estimate quantities from the best indication in the
Contract Documents.
Margins of Cost: Show line items for indirect costs and margins on actual costs only when such
items are listed individually in Applications for Payment. Each item in the Schedule of Values
and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include the total cost and proportionate share of
general overhead and profit margin for each item.
a.
1.04
07/09/2010
Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or
distributed as general overhead expense, at the Contractor's option.
Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Project Schedule to the Owner and Architect prior to
the next Applications for Payment reflecting executed Change Orders or Construction Change
Directives resulting in a change in the Contract Sum.
PROGRESS SCHEDULE:
Submit a bar-chart type progress schedule as an appendix to the executed contract for construction compatible with
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
012900-2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
the County’s Primavera Contract software for each application for payment. On the schedule, indicate a time bar for
each major category or unit of work to be performed at the site, properly sequenced and coordinated with other
elements of work. Show completion of the work sufficiently in advance of the date established for substantial
completion of the work.
Superimpose an S-Curve on the schedule to show the “estimated” total dollar-volume of work performed at
any date during the Contract Time, with a column cost of figures in the left hand margin, ranging from zero
to the Contract Sum.
Submittal Tabulation: With the bar-chart submittal, submit tabulation, by date, of the submittals required
during the first ninety (90) days of Construction Time. This tabulation shall include both those submittals
required during the initial ninety (90) days of construction to maintain the orderly progression of the work,
and those submittals required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.
1.05
A.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by
the Architect and paid for by the Owner.
1.
The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion, and the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B.
Payment-Application Times: Submit for review by Owner and Architect, a draft electronic copy of the
Application for Payment prior to the 25th day of each month. The period covered by each Application
for Payment starts on first day of the month for the Application period and ends on the last day of the
month of the Application period. Once this draft copy has been agreed to by County, Contractor, and
Architect, proceed to items 1.05 C-G below.
C.
Payment-Application Forms: Use County required forms modeled using AIA Document G702 and
Continuation Sheets G703 as the form for Applications for Payment via the County Primavera Contract
Manager interface. Include required Lien Releases as required with each Application for Payment.
D.
Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form. After owner and Architect review and
applicable adjustments are made to the draft Application for Payment, copies to Architect with
adjustments (original signature) with execution by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf
of the Contractor. The Architect will return incomplete applications without action.
1.
2.
E.
Transmittal: Post 1 notarized original copy of each Application for Payment for action by the Architect
via Primavera Contract Manager interface, including required waivers of lien and similar attachments.
1.
2.
F.
Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and the Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives executed and issued prior
to the notarized date of the Application.
Architect shall print (3) copies of and execute the Application for Payment and distribute back to
Contractor and County.
Upon receipt of each executed Application for Payment, County shall post a *.pdf version of this
to the Primavera Contract Manager interface for the Project record.
Waivers of Mechanics Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanics liens
from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors and suppliers for the construction period covered by the
previous application.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
012900-3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
1.
Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested, prior to deduction for retainage, on
each item.
2.
When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.
3.
The Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
4.
Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with the Contractor's waiver of mechanics
lien for the period of construction covered by the application.
a.
5.
G.
Submit final Applications for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity
involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled
to a lien.
Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, and executed in a manner, acceptable to the
Owner.
Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals, that must precede or coincide
with submittal of the first Application for Payment, include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
H.
07/09/2010
List of subcontractors.
List of principal suppliers and fabricators.
Schedule of Values.
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Schedule of principal products.
Submittal Schedule.
List of Contractor's staff assignments.
List of Contractor's principal consultants.
Copies of building permits and Notice of Commencement.
Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of the Work.
Preconstruction Conference.
Notice to Proceed.
Contractor training by County on the Primavera Contract Manager interface.
Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment.
1.
2.
This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for
Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with this application include:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
Occupancy permits and similar approvals.
Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements.
Test/adjust/balance records.
Maintenance instructions.
Meter readings.
Startup performance reports.
Changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.
Final cleaning.
Application for reduction of retainage and consent of surety.
Advice on shifting insurance coverage(s).
Final progress photographs.
List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of Substantial
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
012900-4
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
m.
I.
07/09/2010
Completion.
Population of building asset information into Owner-provided spreadsheet format.
Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with
submittal of the final Application for Payment include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Completion of Project closeout requirements.
Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion.
Ensure that unsettled claims will be settled.
Ensure that incomplete Work (Contractor and Architect’s) punch lists are accepted and will be
completed without undue delay.
Transmittal of required Project construction records to the Owner.
Certified property survey.
Proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
Removal of temporary facilities and services.
Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements.
Change of door locks to Owner's access.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PAR-T 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 012900
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
012900-5
This page left intentionally blank
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
SECTION 013113
PROJECT COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 and other Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordinating construction
operations including, but not necessarily limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
2.
3.
1.03
A.
Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of these Specifications to assure efficient
and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included under
different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
2.
3.
Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where installation
of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own
installation.
Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required
maintenance, service, and repair.
Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings.
1.
C.
Division 1 Section "Project Meetings" for progress meetings, coordination meetings, and
preinstallation conferences.
Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for preparing and submitting the Contractor's Construction
Schedule.
Division 1 Section “Closeout Procedures" for coordinating contract closeout.
COORDINATION
1.
B.
General project coordination procedures.
Conservation.
Coordination Drawings.
Administrative and supervisory personnel.
Cleaning and protection.
Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate contractors where coordination of their work is
required.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with
other construction activities to avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress of the Work. Such
administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
PROJECT COORDINATION
013113-1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
1.04
Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated in, the
Work.
SUBMITTALS
Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings where careful coordination is needed for
installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. Prepare coordination drawings where
limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different
components.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Preparation of schedules.
Installation and removal of temporary facilities.
Delivery and processing of submittals.
Progress meetings.
Project closeout activities.
Conservation: Coordinate construction operations to assure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
1.
A.
07/09/2010
Show the relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.
Indicate required installation sequences.
Comply with requirements contained in Section "Submittal Procedures."
Staff Names: At the Preconstruction Conference, submit a list of the Contractor's principal staff
assignments, including the superintendent and other personnel in attendance at the Project Site. Identify
individuals and their duties and responsibilities. List their addresses and telephone numbers.
1.
Post copies of the list in the Project meeting room, the temporary field office.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS
A.
Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and
conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in an acceptable manner.
B.
Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests to minimize the necessity of
uncovering completed construction for that purpose.
3.02
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place, during handling and
installation. Apply protective covering where required to assure protection from damage or deterioration at
Substantial Completion.
B.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the
remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to assure operability
without damaging effects.
PROJECT COORDINATION
013113-2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
C.
07/09/2010
Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction,
completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure
during the construction period. Where applicable, such exposures include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
Excessive static or dynamic loading.
Excessive internal or external pressures.
Excessively high or low temperatures.
Thermal shock.
Excessively high or low humidity.
Air contamination or pollution.
Water or ice.
Solvents.
Chemicals.
Light.
Radiation.
Puncture.
Abrasion.
Heavy traffic.
Soiling, staining, and corrosion.
Bacteria.
Rodent and insect infestation.
Combustion.
Electrical current.
High-speed operation.
Improper lubrication.
Unusual wear or other misuse.
Contact between incompatible materials.
Destructive testing.
Misalignment.
Excessive weathering.
Unprotected storage.
Improper shipping or handling.
Theft.
Vandalism.
END OF SECTION 013113
PROJECT COORDINATION
013113-3
This page left intentionally blank
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
SECTION 013119
PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 and other Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings, including, but
not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
2.
1.03
Preconstruction conferences.
Progress meetings.
Division 1 Section "Project Meetings" for procedures for coordinating project meetings with
other construction activities.
Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting the Contractor's Construction
Schedule.
PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A.
Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to the Owner
and the Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at
the Project Site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and
personnel assignments.
B.
Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, Architect, and their consultants; the prime
contractors; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the
conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the Work.
C.
Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
1.
Tentative construction schedule.
2.
Critical work sequencing.
3.
Designation of responsible personnel.
4.
Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
5.
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
6.
Distribution of Contract Documents.
7.
Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
8.
Preparation of record documents.
9.
Use of the premises.
10.
Parking availability.
11.
Office, work, and storage areas.
12.
Equipment deliveries and priorities.
13.
Safety procedures.
14.
First aid.
PROJECT MEETINGS
013119-1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
15.
16.
17.
1.04
07/09/2010
Security.
Housekeeping.
Working hours.
PROGRESS MEETINGS
A.
Conduct progress meetings at the Project Site at twice monthly intervals. Owner to notify the Architect
and prime contractors of scheduled meeting dates and times. Coordinate dates of meetings with
preparation of the payment request.
B.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner and the Architect, each prime contractor,
supplier, or other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or
performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the
conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
C.
Agenda: Prepared by Contractor. Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress
meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to the status of the Project.
1.
2.
Owner's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine where each
activity is in relation to the Owner's Construction Schedule, whether on time or ahead or behind
schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments
from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to insure that
current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
D.
Interface requirements.
Time.
Sequences.
Status of submittals.
Deliveries.
Off-site fabrication problems.
Access.
Site utilization.
Temporary facilities and services.
Hours of work.
Hazards and risks.
Housekeeping.
Quality and work standards.
Change Orders.
Documentation of information for payment requests.
Reporting: No later than 3 days after each meeting, Contractor will distribute minutes of the meeting to
each party present and to parties who should have been present.
1.
Schedule Updating: Revise the Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where
revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue the revised schedule concurrently
with the report of each meeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
PROJECT MEETINGS
013119-2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
SECTION 013200
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 and other Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of
construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.03
A.
Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values.
Division 1 Section "Project Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference
minutes.
Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.
Division 1 Section "Quality Control" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections.
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic files as Project Record
Documents at Project closeout.
DEFINITIONS
Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and
controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and
resources.
1.
2.
B.
Preliminary Construction Schedule: Contractor posts to Primavera Contract Manager interface.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Contractor posts to Primavera Contract Manager interface.
Submittals Schedule.
Daily construction reports: Contractor posts to Primavera Contract Manager interface.
Material location reports.
Field condition reports.
Special reports.
Construction photographs.
Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early
start and finish times.
Predecessor activity is an activity that must be completed before a given activity can be started.
CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where
activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities
can be performed and the critical path of Project.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
C.
Critical Path: The longest continuous chain of activities through the network schedule that establishes the
minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
D.
Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.
E.
Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1.
2.
3.
Float time belongs to Owner.
Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early
start of the following activity.
Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely
affecting the planned Project completion date.
F.
Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater
detail.
G.
Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element.
H.
Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.
I.
Network Diagram:
relationships.
1.04
A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity
SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article and in-house
scheduling personnel to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects
with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
B.
Preliminary Submittals Schedule: Submit for Owner and Architect record at pre-Construction
Conference. Arrange the following information in a tabular format:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Scheduled date for first submittal.
Specification Section number and title.
Submittal category (action or informational).
Name of subcontractor.
Description of the Work covered.
Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
C.
Construction Schedule: Contractor posts to Primavera Contract Manager interface. Submit for Owner and
Architect record at pre-Construction Conference, large enough to show entire schedule for entire
construction period.
D.
Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit for Owner and Architect record at pre-Construction Conference,
large enough to show entire network for entire construction period.
E.
Construction Photographs: Submit (1) set of digital files of each photographic view within seven days of
taking photographs.
1.
Format: Digital, 8.0 megapixels or higher suitable for printing on 8-by-10-inch (203-by-254-mm).
Digital files shall be stored on CD or DVD-Rom media.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
2.
Identification:
information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
07/09/2010
On the CD or DVD-Rom case, provide an applied label with the following
Name of Project.
Name and address of photographer.
Name of Architect.
Name of Contractor.
Date photograph was taken.
Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and
elevation or story of construction.
F.
Daily Construction Reports: Contractor posts to Primavera Contract Manager interface. Keep on record
at Contractor office and at job site at all times during construction.
G.
Material Location Reports: Keep on record at Contractor office and at job site at all times during
construction.
H.
Daily Field Condition Reports: Keep on record at Contractor office and at job site at all times during
construction.
I.
Special Reports: Submit copies to Owner and Architect at time of unusual event.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting.
B.
Photographer Qualifications: An individual of established reputation who has been regularly engaged as
a professional photographer for not less than three years.
C.
Pre-Construction Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 1 Sections.
Review methods and procedures related to the Preliminary Construction Schedule and Contractor's
Construction Schedule, including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
Notice to Proceed, Notice of Commencement.
Distribution of the Contract Documents.
Designation of responsible personnel.
Construction schedule. CPM or in-house CPM consultant qualifications.
Phasing.
Critical work sequencing.
Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
Parking availability.
Office, work, and storage areas.
Equipment deliveries and priorities.
First aid.
Security.
Use of premises, office and storage areas, security, housekeeping, and Owner’s needs.
Working hours.
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
Transmittal, review, and distribution of Contractor’s submittals.
Requests for additional information (RFI’s).
Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
Maintaining and Preparation of Record Documents.
Progress cleaning.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
1.06
07/09/2010
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction
activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B.
Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts,
Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.
1.
2.
C.
Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved.
Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in
proper sequence.
Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer including access to Project site and use of temporary
facilities including temporary lighting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by
construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing,
fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.
1.
2.
3.
2.02
Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary bar-chart schedule. Include submittals
required during the first 90 days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly progress
of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.
Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning & Scheduling."
B.
Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of
Substantial Completion.
1.
C.
Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early
completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of
the Work. Comply with the following:
1.
2.
Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically
allowed by Architect.
Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and major
items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement
cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and
delivery.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 4
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
3.
4.
5.
D.
07/09/2010
Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section
"Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's
Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.
Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than (7) days for startup and testing.
Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial
Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of
Substantial Completion.
Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as
follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.
Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract.
Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner.
Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date
indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary of Work." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the
earliest possible delivery date.
Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date
indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary of Work." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the
earliest possible delivery date.
Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
7.
Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work,
including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
8.
Coordination with existing construction.
Limitations of continued occupancies.
Uninterruptible services.
Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
Use of premises restrictions.
Provisions for future construction.
Seasonal variations.
Environmental control.
Subcontract awards.
Submittals.
Purchases.
Mockups.
Fabrication.
Sample testing.
Deliveries.
Installation.
Tests and inspections.
Adjusting.
Curing.
Startup and placement into final use and operation.
Area Separations: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work.
Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with
other construction activities to provide for the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Structural completion.
Permanent space enclosure.
Completion of mechanical installation.
Completion of electrical installation.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 5
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
e.
07/09/2010
Substantial Completion.
E.
Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not
limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion.
F.
Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission,
prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the
overall project schedule.
G.
Computer Software: Prepare schedules using a program that has been developed specifically to manage
construction schedules.
2.03
A.
2.04
PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule at time of preConstruction Conference. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately.
Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction
activities for first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work.
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)
A.
Gantt-Chart Schedule:
Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type,
Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of the Work.
Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was
received since the start of Project.
B.
Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each
week with a continuous vertical line.
1.
2.05
For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated
completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)
A.
General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.
B.
Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 30 days of date established for commencement of
the Work. Outline significant construction activities for the first 60 days of construction. Include
skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated
activities.
C.
CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a CPM network analysis diagram.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use
no later than 30 days after date established for commencement of the Work.
Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including
subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule
information.
Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress.
Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.
Use "one workday" as the unit of time.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 6
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
D.
CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the
preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.
1.
Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each
activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
A.
Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.
Description of activity.
Principal events of activity.
Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.
Early and late start dates.
Early and late finish dates.
Activity duration in workdays.
Total float or slack time.
Average size of workforce.
Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the Schedule of Values).
Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports for progress
site meetings showing the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.06
Sub-networks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path.
Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start-total float"
sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
F.
Preparation and processing of submittals.
Purchase of materials.
Delivery.
Fabrication.
Installation.
Processing: Process data to produce output data or a computer-drawn, time-scaled network.
Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the
CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.
Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with
most float near the edges.
a.
E.
07/09/2010
Identification of activities that have changed.
Changes in early and late start dates.
Changes in early and late finish dates.
Changes in activity durations in workdays.
Changes in the critical path.
Changes in total float or slack time.
Changes in the Contract Time.
REPORTS
Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information
concerning events at Project site:
1.
2.
3.
List of subcontractors at Project site.
List of separate contractors at Project site.
Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 7
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
07/09/2010
High and low temperatures and general weather conditions.
Accidents.
Meetings and significant decisions.
Unusual events (refer to special reports).
Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
Meter readings and similar recordings.
Emergency procedures.
Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
Change Orders received and implemented.
Construction Change Directives received.
Services connected and disconnected.
Equipment or system tests and startups.
Partial Completions and occupancies.
Substantial Completions authorized.
B.
Material Location Reports: At weekly intervals, prepare a comprehensive list of materials delivered to
and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items
recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items
of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site.
C.
Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the
Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report. Submit with a request for information on CSI Form
13.2A. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for
changing the Contract Documents.
2.07
SPECIAL REPORTS
A.
General: Submit special reports directly to Owner and Architect within one day of an occurrence.
Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.
B.
Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site,
whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events,
persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar
pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM
scheduling.
1.
2.
B.
In-House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor employs
skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit
qualifications.
Meetings: Scheduling consultant or in-house personnel shall attend all meetings related to Project
progress, alleged delays, and time impact.
Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At team progress site meeting intervals, update schedule
to reflect actual construction progress and activities.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 8
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
1.
2.
3.
C.
Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been
recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.
Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to,
changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Construction Manager, Owner,
separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a
need-to-know schedule responsibility.
1.
2.
3.02
07/09/2010
Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same
locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the
Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A.
Photographer: Engage a qualified commercial photographer to take construction photographs.
B.
File format: Digital, 8.0 megapixels or higher suitable for printing on 8x10.
C.
Date Stamp: Unless otherwise indicated, date and time stamp each photograph as it is being taken so
stamp is integral to photograph.
D.
Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take four color photographs of Project site
and surrounding properties from different vantage points. Show existing conditions adjacent to property.
E.
Periodic Construction Photographs: Take four color photographs monthly, coinciding with cutoff date
associated with each Application for Payment. Photographer shall select vantage points to best show
status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.
1.
Field Office Prints: Retain one set of prints of periodic photographs in field office at Project site,
available at all times for reference. Identify photographs the same as for those submitted to
Architect.
F.
Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take eight color photographs after date of Substantial
Completion for submission as Project Record Documents. Architect will direct photographer for desired
vantage points.
G.
Digital Files of Construction and Final photographs: provide (1) set of files on CD or DVD-Rom media to
Architect at project’s final completion.
END OF SECTION 013200
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 9
This page left intentionally blank
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
SECTION 013300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 and other Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product
Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment.
2.
Division 1 Section "Project Coordination" for submitting Coordination Drawings.
3.
Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports,
including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule.
4.
Division 1 Section "Quality Control" for submitting test and inspection reports and DelegatedDesign Submittals and for erecting mockups.
5.
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties Project Record Documents
and operation and maintenance manuals.
6.
Division 1 Section "Substitution Procedures" for product substitutions.
1.03
DEFINITIONS
A.
Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.
B.
Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's approval. Submittals
may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.04
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
General: Copies of Architectural Floor Plan drawings in digital format will be provided to the Contractor
once by the architect prior to construction in accordance with the “Authorization Statement for Electronic
Transfer” form. (Example attached herein). Information provided in digital format is for the sole
information and use of the authorizing entity. Further copying or transfer of this information is prohibited
by copyright. Costs for such files as required by Architect and its consultants shall be paid for by the
Owner.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction
activities.
1.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and
related activities that require sequential activity.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300-1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
2.
07/09/2010
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing
will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.
a.
Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with
other submittals until related submittals are received.
C.
Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related
construction activities.
D.
Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for re-submittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal.
1.
Initial Review: Allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if
processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will
advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2.
If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.
3.
Allow 14 days for processing each re-submittal.
4.
No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals
enough in advance of the Work to permit processing.
E.
Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1.
Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2.
Provide a space approximately 4 by 8 inches (100 by 200 mm) on label or beside title block to
record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
3.
Submittal tracking number: Mark each submittal with a tracking number as follows:
25-05500-1A
Re-submittal Designation. Use "A" for first re-submittal, "B" for second,
etc.
Submittal sequence number for Specification Section. Use a separate
number for each transmittal, in sequence, for items within each Spec.
Section.
Specification Section.
Transmittal number. Use a separate transmittal for each item or group of
items within the same Section submitted together.
4.
Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a.
Project name.
b.
Date.
c.
Name and address of Architect.
d.
Name and address of Contractor.
e.
Name and address of subcontractor.
f.
Name and address of supplier.
g.
Name of manufacturer.
h.
Submittal tracking number.
i.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
F.
Other necessary identification. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the
Contract Documents on submittals.
G.
Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes
noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300-2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
07/09/2010
For submittals not requiring raised seal: Post one *.pdf copy of submittal to Architect via County
Primavera Contract Manager interface (provide notification of posting date by Contractor to
Architect).
For submittals requiring raised seal: Submit seven copies of submittal to Architect. Upon
approval, Contractor shall post one scanned *.pdf, *.tiff, or *.jpg copy of submittal to Architect
via County Primavera Contract Manager interface (provide notification of posting date by
Contractor to Architect).
For product samples: Submit three submittals to Architect.
Copies of approved submittals for maintenance manuals and Project Closeout will be made by
Contractor.
All submittals shall have (1) copy returned to Owner for Project record by Contractor after each
review by Architect has been completed. Owner shall sign off on each submittal at this time. For
*.pdf submittals (all except those requiring sign and seal), Contractor shall post the Architect
approved and Owner sign-off submittal to the Primavera Contract Manager interface.
H.
Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling.
Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review,
received from sources other than Contractor.
1.
On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information,
requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and
deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, including minor variations and
limitations. Include the same label information as the related submittal.
2.
Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with requirements of
the Contract Documents.
3.
Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:
a.
Project name.
b.
Date.
c.
Destination (To:).
d.
Source (From:).
e.
Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
f.
Category and type of submittal.
g.
Submittal purpose and description.
h.
Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
i.
Remarks.
j.
Signature of transmitter.
I.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators,
installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction
activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
J.
Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in
connection with construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
1.
Number of Copies: Submit the number of copies of each submittal required, unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will retain at least one copy marked up as a Project Record Document.
B.
Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of
product or equipment.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300-3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
1.
2.
3.
07/09/2010
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not
suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
Manufacturer's written recommendations.
b.
Manufacturer's product specifications.
c.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
d.
Standard color charts.
e.
Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
f.
Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
g.
Printed performance curves.
h.
Operational range diagrams.
i.
Mill reports.
j.
Standard product operating and maintenance manuals.
k.
Compliance with recognized trade association standards.
l.
Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
m.
Application of testing agency labels and seals.
n.
Notation of coordination requirements.
C.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop
Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1.
Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
Dimensions.
b.
Identification of products.
c.
Fabrication and installation drawings.
d.
Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
e.
Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control
wiring.
f.
Shop work manufacturing instructions.
g.
Templates and patterns.
h.
Schedules.
i.
Design calculations.
j.
Compliance with specified standards.
k.
Notation of coordination requirements.
l.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
2.
Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
3.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings
on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by 40 inches (750 by
1000 mm).
D.
Coordination Drawings: Provide to show attachment to adjacent work.
E.
Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following:
1.
Comply and coordinate with Sections that call for mockups.
2.
Samples for Selection:
a.
When indicated, submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units
showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
b.
When indicated, submit full-size units or samples of size indicated, prepared from the same
material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically
identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture
variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections
of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete
units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color
range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300-4
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
3.
4.
5.
6.
07/09/2010
Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of
qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated. Attach label
on unexposed side that includes the following:
a.
Generic description of Sample.
b.
Product name or name of manufacturer.
c.
Sample source.
Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead,
provide the following:
a.
Size limitations.
b.
Compliance with recognized standards.
c.
Availability.
d.
Delivery time.
Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
a.
If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the product
represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate
limits of the variations.
b.
Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate
workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and
similar construction characteristics.
Number of Samples for Selection: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample
set; remainder will be returned marked up as required.
a.
Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques,
connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.
F.
Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Submittals and Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to
determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a.
Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification
Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.
b.
Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are
the property of Contractor.
G.
Delegated-Design Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Control."
H.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction
Progress Documentation" for Construction Manager's action.
I.
Submittals Schedule:
Documentation."
J.
Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."
K.
Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."
L.
Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion
of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design.
Include the following information in tabular form:
1.
Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.
2.
Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
3.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300-5
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
2.02
07/09/2010
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.
1.
Number of Copies: Submit copies as required of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated for
review by Architect.
2.
Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity
responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer
or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.
3.
Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Control."
B.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction
Progress Documentation."
C.
Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or
person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of
architects and owners, and other information specified.
D.
Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product
complies with requirements.
E.
Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with
requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification
Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.
F.
Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer
complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project.
G.
Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where
required.
H.
Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material
complies with requirements.
I.
Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard
form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements.
J.
Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for
compliance with performance requirements.
K.
Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of
product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
L.
Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard
form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or
after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements.
M.
Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer
complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and
witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing
agency.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300-6
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
N.
Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the
following information:
1.
Name of evaluation organization.
2.
Date of evaluation.
3.
Time period when report is in effect.
4.
Product and manufacturers' names.
5.
Description of product.
6.
Test procedures and results.
7.
Limitations of use.
O.
Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal
maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout
Procedures."
P.
Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and
design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and
other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable.
Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.
Q.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's
recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include
name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as
applicable:
1.
Preparation of substrates.
2.
Required substrate tolerances.
3.
Sequence of installation or erection.
4.
Required installation tolerances.
5.
Required adjustments.
6.
Recommendations for cleaning and protection.
R.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service
representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:
1.
Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.
2.
Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3.
Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
4.
Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and,
if not, what corrective action was taken.
5.
Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies
with requirements.
6.
Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7.
Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
S.
Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or
bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of
deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
T.
Material Safety Data Sheets: Retain copies on site at all times, and submit information as part of Project
close out submittals.
U.
Listed Products: include in each submittal, a copy of the Approved Products as listed in the contract
documents. If substitutions to these products are approved by Architect prior to submittal in accordance
with Division 1 “Substitution Procedures”, Contractor shall be responsible for updating and informing
jurisdictional authority.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300-7
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A.
Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and
field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and
location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's
approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for
compliance with the Contract Documents.
1.
3.02
Stamp or statement shall include the following: "The Contractor represents that he has determined
and verified all materials, field measurements, and field construction criteria related thereto or will
do so, and that he has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals
with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents.”
ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A.
General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return
them without action.
B.
Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will
mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:
This review was performed for the limited purpose of determining general conformance with the
design concept of the project and general compliance with the formation given in the Contract
Documents. Modifications or comments made on the Submittal during this review do not
relieve the Contractor from compliance with the requirements of the drawings and
specifications.
Approval of a specific item does not include approval of the assembly of which the item is a
component. The Contractor is responsible for: quantities and dimensions to be confirmed and
correlated at the jobsite; information that pertains solely to the fabrication processes or to the
means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction; coordination of the
work of all trades; and for performing all work in a safe and satisfactory manner.
 APPROVED
TOTeMS Architecture, Inc.
Sarasota, Florida
 PROVIDE AS NOTED
 REVISE AND RESUBMIT
DATE _________________
 RESUBMIT SPECIFIED ITEM
 REJECTED
BY ___________________
 Not a specified product
 Incomplete
 Other _____________________
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300-8
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
C.
The action stamp above will be appropriately marked and executed to indicate whether the submittal
returned is approved for unrestricted release, final-but-restricted release, returned for re-submittal, or not
approved.
1.
Final Unrestricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "Approved," the Work covered
by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents.
Final payment depends on that compliance.
a.
Marking: “Approved”
2.
Final-But-Restricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "Approved as Noted," the
Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on
the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that
compliance.
a.
Marking: “Provide As Noted”
3.
Returned for Re-submittal: When the Architect marks a submittal "Not Approved, Revise and
Resubmit," do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication,
delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the notations; resubmit
without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark.
a.
Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "Not Approved, Revise and
Resubmit" at the Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress.
b.
Marking: “Revise and Resubmit” or “Resubmit Specified Item”
4.
Not approved: When the Architect marks a submittal “Rejected”, the Work covered by the
submittal does not conform to the contract documents. Submittal of specified item is required.
D.
Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and
return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate
party.
E.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300-9
This page left intentionally blank
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
AUTHORIZATION STATEMENT For Electronic Transfer
Project No.: 09265
Project Name: NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
ORDERED BY: (Type Company name, contact, and address)
DESCRIPTION OF SERVICE:
FEE BASIS:
Providing electronic base drawing information.
$250 (Minimum $250 per request)
Fee Waived for initial one-time transfer of Architectural files
TERMS AND CONDITIONS:
All documents and information prepared by TOTeMS, Inc. for
this project, including information in electronic format, are instruments of our service, and are for use solely with respect to
this project. TOTeMS, Inc. retains all common law, statutory and
other reserved rights, including the copyright for these instruments of service.
Use of design information in electronic format from TOTeMS,
Inc. does not represent review or approval of the users work by
the design professional. Making this information available in
electronic format, in no way implies that the recipient is required
by TOTeMS, Inc. to use it. Use of information supplied by TOTeMS, Inc. in electronic format is at the sole risk and liability of
the user. The user agrees to waive any claim against TOTeMS,
Inc. and our employees, and to defend, indemnify, and hold them
harmless from any claim or liability that allegedly arises from the
use of information furnished in electronic format.
The decision to use design information in electronic format obligates the user to verify the accuracy of the design against hardcopy representation of the design bearing the same issuance date.
Information supplied in electronic format represents the most current status of the design at the date of the drawing=s issuance. It
is the user=s responsibility to verify that the electronic information in their possession stays current throughout the life of the
project, and to update the information as required to maintain it
current. The user is also responsible to compare design information received in electronic format with field measurements and
conditions prior to their making use of the information.
Information provided in digital format is for the sole information
and use of the authorizing entity. Further copying or transfer of
this information in prohibited by copyright. Payment for information in electronic format is due in full prior to transmittal of the
information.
AUTHORIZATION:
APPROVED/ACCEPTED BY:
I/We hereby grant permission or have obtained permission for
TOTeMS, Inc. to perform the above services.
(Type Company name)
SIGN HERE: _________________________________________
Print or type signer’s name here: _______________________
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300-10
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
TOTeMS, INC.
____________________________________________________
Project Manager
Date: _____________________
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300-11
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
SECTION 014219
REFERENCE STANDARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 and other Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
General: Basic contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B
"Indicated": The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings;
or to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and similar requirements in the Contract
Documents. Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to help the user
locate the reference. Location is not limited.
C.
"Directed": Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and
"permitted" mean directed by the Architect, requested by the Architect, and similar phrases.
D.
"Approved": The term "approved," when used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the
Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Architect's duties and responsibilities
as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.
E.
"Regulations": The term "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by
authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction
industry that control performance of the Work.
F.
"Furnish": The term "furnish" means to supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading,
unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations by the indicated entity. In the event the indicated
entity is not indicated, unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations shall be
performed by the Contractor.
G.
"Install": The term "install" describes operations at the Project site including the actual unloading,
temporary storage, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension,
finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H.
"Provide": The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I.
"Installer": An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an
employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity,
including installation, erection, application, or similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced
in the operations they are engaged to perform.
1.
2.
The term "experienced," when used with the term "installer," means having successfully
completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being
familiar with the special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
Trades: Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must
be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as
"carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
3.
07/09/2010
of the corresponding generic name.
Assigning Specialists: Certain Sections of the Specifications require that specific construction
activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in those operations. The
specialists must be engaged for those activities, and their assignments are requirements over which
the Contractor has no option. However, the ultimate responsibility for fulfilling contract
requirements remains with the Contractor.
a.
This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcing building codes and
similar regulations governing the Work. It is also not intended to interfere with local tradeunion jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions.
J.
"Project site" is the space available to the Contractor for performing construction activities, either
exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the Project. The extent of the
Project site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on
which the Project is to be built.
K.
"Testing Agencies": A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or
tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those
inspections or tests.
1.03
SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION
A.
Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the 2004
CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.
B.
Specification Content: These Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the
intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These
conventions are as follows:
1.
2.
Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is
abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not
stated, shall be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural and
plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents
indicates.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements
expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. At certain locations in
the Section Text, subjective language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be
fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor or by others when so noted.
a.
1.04
The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are
implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A.
Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements,
applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly
into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract
Documents by reference.
B.
Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents.
C.
Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards
establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the
most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal,
to the Architect for a decision before proceeding.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
1.
D.
07/09/2010
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of the requirements. Refer uncertainties to the Architect for a decision
before proceeding.
Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project must be familiar with industry
standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the
Contract Documents.
1.
Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, the Contractor
shall obtain copies directly from the publication source and make them available on request.
E.
Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently
abbreviated. Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in the Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards-producing organization,
authorities having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the text provision. Refer to
Gale Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional
Associations of the U.S.," which are available in most libraries.
F.
Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently
abbreviated. The following abbreviations and acronyms, as referenced in the Contract Documents, mean
the associated names. Names and addresses are subject to change and are believed, but are not assured, to
be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
AA
Aluminum Association
900 19th St., NW, Suite 300
Washington, DC 20006
www.aluminum.org
(202) 862-5100
AABC
Associated Air Balance Council
1518 K St., NW, Suite 503
Washington, DC 20005
www.aabchq.com
(202) 737-0202
AAMA
American Architectural Manufacturers
Association
1827 Walden Office Sq., Suite 104
Schaumburg, IL 60173-4268
www.aamanet.org
(847) 303-5664
AAN
American Association of Nurserymen
(See ANLA)
AASHTO
American Association of State Highway
and Transportation Officials
444 North Capitol St., NW, Suite 249
Washington, DC 20001
www.aashto.org
(202) 624-5800
AATCC
American Association of Textile
Chemists and Colorists
P.O. Box 12215
(919) 549-8141
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
One Davis Dr.
Research Triangle Park, NC 27709-2215
www.aatcc.org
ABMA
American Bearing Manufacturers
Association
(Formerly: Anti-Friction Bearing
Manufacturers Association)
1200 19th St., NW, Suite 300
Washington, DC 20036-2401
www.abma-dc.org
(202) 429-5155
ABMA
American Boiler Manufacturers
Association
950 North Glebe Rd., Suite 160
Arlington, VA 22203-1824
www.abma.com
(703) 522-7350
ACI
American Concrete Institute
P.O. Box 9094
Farmington Hills, MI 48333-9094
www.aci-int.org
(248) 848-3700
ACIL
ACIL: The Association of Independent
Scientific, Engineering, and Testing
Firms
1629 K St., NW, Suite 400
Washington, DC 20006
www.acil.org
(202) 887-5872
ACPA
American Concrete Pipe Association
222 West Las Colinas Blvd., Suite 641
Irving, TX 75039-5423
www.concrete-pipe.org
(972) 506-7216
ADC
Air Diffusion Council
(312) 201-0101
11 South LaSalle St., Suite 1400
Chicago, IL 60603
AEIC
Association of Edison Illuminating
Companies
600 N. 18th St.
P.O. Box 2641
Birmingham, AL 35291-0992
AFBMA
Anti-Friction Bearing
Manufacturers Association
(See ABMA)
AFPA
American Forest and Paper
Association
(202) 463-2700
(Formerly: National Forest Products
Association)
1111 19th St., NW, Suite 800
Washington, DC 20036
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-4
(205) 250-2530
(800) 878-8878
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
AGA
American Gas Association
1515 Wilson Blvd.
Arlington, VA 22209
www.aga.com
(703) 841-8400
AHA
American Hardboard Association
1210 W. Northwest Hwy
Palatine, IL 60067-1897
(847) 934-8800
AHAM
Association of Home Appliance
Manufacturers
20 N. Wacker Dr., Suite 1500
Chicago, IL 60606
www.aham.org
(312) 984-5800
AI
Asphalt Institute
Research Park Dr.
P.O. Box 14052
Lexington, KY 40512-4052
www.asphaltinstitute.org
(606) 288-4960
AIA
The American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20006-5292
www.aia.org
(202) 626-7300
AIA
American Insurance Association
1130 Connecticut Ave., NW, Suite 1000
Washington, DC 20036
(202) 828-7100
AIHA
American Industrial Hygiene
Association
2700 Prosperity Ave., Suite 250
Fairfax, VA 22031
(703) 849-888
AISC
American Institute of Steel
Construction
One East Wacker Dr., Suite 3100
Chicago, IL 60601-2001
(800) 644-2400
(312) 670-2400
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute
1101 17th St., NW
Washington, DC 20036-4700
www.steel.org
(202) 452-7100
AITC
American Institute of Timber
Construction
7012 S. Revere Pkwy, Suite 140
Englewood, CO 80112
www.aitc-glulam.org
(303) 792-9559
ALA
American Laminators Association
(See LMA)
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-5
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
ALCA
Associated Landscape Contractors of
America
12200 Sunrise Valley Dr., Suite 150
Reston, VA 20191
www.alca.org
(703) 620-6363
ALI
Associated Laboratories, Inc.
P.O. Box 152837
1323 Wall St.
Dallas, TX 75315
(214) 565-0593
ALSC
American Lumber Standards Committee
P.O. Box 210
Germantown, MD 20875
(301) 972-1700
AMCA
Air Movement and Control Association
International, Inc.
30 W. University Dr.
Arlington Heights, IL 60004-1893
www.amca.org
(847) 394-0150
ANLA
American Nursery and Landscape
Association
(Formerly: American Association of
Nurserymen)
1250 Eye St., NW, Suite 500
Washington, DC 20005
(202) 789-2900
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
11 West 42nd St., 13th Floor
New York, NY 10036-8002
www.ansi.org
(212) 642-4900
AOAC
AOAC International
(301) 924-7077
481 N. Frederick Ave., Suite 500
Gaithersburg, MD 20877
AOSA
Association of Official Seed Analysts
201 N. 8th St., Suite 400
P.O. Box 81152
Lincoln, NE 68501-1152
(402) 476-3852
APA
APA-The Engineered Wood Association
(Formerly: American Plywood
Association)
P.O. Box 11700
Tacoma, WA 98411-0700
www.apawood.org
(206) 565-6600
APA
Architectural Precast Association
P.O. Box 08669
Fort Myers, FL 33908-0669
(941) 454-6989
API
American Petroleum Institute
1220 L St., NW, Suite 900
(202) 682-8000
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-6
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
Washington, DC 20005-8029
ARI
Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration
Institute
4301 Fairfax Dr., Suite 425
Arlington, VA 22203
www.ari.org
(703) 524-8800
ARMA
Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers
Association
Center Park
4041 Powder Mill Rd., Suite 404
Calverton, MD 20705
(301) 231-9050
ASA
Acoustical Society of America
500 Sunnyside Blvd.
Woodbury, NY 11797
(516) 576-2360
ASC
Adhesive and Sealant Council
1627 K St., NW, Suite 1000
Washington, DC 20006-1707
(202) 452-1500
ASCA
Architectural Spray Coaters
Association
230 W. Wells St., Suite 311
Milwaukee, WI 53203
(414) 273-3430
ASCE
American Society of Civil
Engineers-World Headquarters
1801 Alexander Bell Dr.
Reston, VA 20191-4400
www.asce.org
(800) 548-2723
(703) 295-6000
ASHES
American Society for Healthcare
Environmental Services - Division
of the American Hospital Assoc.
One North Franklin, Suite 2700
Chicago, IL 60606
(800) 424-2626
(312) 422-3860
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and AirConditioning Engineers
1791 Tullie Circle, NE
Atlanta, GA 30329-2305
www.ashrae.org
(800) 527-4723
(404) 636-8400
ASLA
American Society of Landscape
Architects
4401 Connecticut Ave., NW, 5th Floor
Washington, DC 20008-2369
www.asla.org
(202) 686-2752
ASME
American Society of Mechanical
Engineers
345 East 47th St.
(800) 434-2763
(212) 705-7722
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-7
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
New York, NY 10017-2392
www.asme.org
ASPA
American Sod Producers Association
(See TPI)
ASPE
American Society of Plumbing
Engineers
3617 Thousand Oaks Blvd., Suite 210
Westlake Village, CA 91362-3649
(805) 495-7120
ASQC
American Society for Quality
Control
611 East Wisconsin, Ave.
Milwaukee, WI 53201-3005
www.asqc.org
(800) 248-1946
(414) 272-8575
ASSE
American Society of Sanitary
Engineering
28901 Clemens Rd.
Westlake, OH 44145
www.asse-plumbing.org
(216) 835-3040
ASTM
American Society for Testing and
Materials
100 Barr Harbor Dr.
West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959
www.astm.org
(610) 832-9500
ATIS
Alliance for Telecommunications
Industry Solutions
(Formerly: Exchange Carriers
Standards Association)
1200 G St., NW, Suite 500
Washington, DC 20005
(202) 628-6380
AWCI
Association of the Wall and Ceiling
Industries--International
307 E. Annandale Rd., Suite 200
Falls Church, VA 22042-2433
www.awci.org
(703) 534-8300
AWCMA
American Window Covering
Manufacturers Association
(See WCMA)
AWI
Architectural Woodwork Institute
1952 Isaac Newton Sq.
Reston, VA 20190
www.awinet.org
(703) 733-0600
AWPA
American Wood Preservers' Association
3246 Fall Creek Hwy, Suite 1900
Granbury, TX 76049-7979
(817) 326-6300
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-8
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
AWPB
American Wood Preservers' Bureau
(This organization is now defunct.)
AWS
American Welding Society
550 NW LeJeune Rd.
Miami, FL 33126
www.amweld.org
(800) 443-9353
(305) 443-9353
AWWA
American Water Works Association
6666 W. Quincy Ave.
Denver, CO 80235
www.awwa.org
(800) 926-7337
(303) 794-7711
BANC
Brick Association of North
Carolina
P.O. Box 13290
Greensboro, NC 27415-3290
(800) 622-7425
(910) 273-5566
BHMA
Builders Hardware Manufacturers
Association
355 Lexington Ave., 17th Floor
New York, NY 10017-6603
(212) 661-4261
BIA
Brick Institute of America
11490 Commerce Park Dr.
Reston, VA 22091-1525
www.bia.org
(703) 620-0010
BIFMA
The Business and Institutional
Furniture Manufacturer's Association
2680 Horizon Dr., SE, Suite A1
Grand Rapids, MI 49546-7500
www.bifma.com
(616) 285-3963
CAGI
Compressed Air and Gas Institute
c/o Thomas Associates, Inc.
1300 Sumner Ave.
Cleveland, OH 44115-2851
www.taol.com/cagi
(216) 241-7333
CAUS
Color Association of the United
States
409 W. 44th St.
New York, NY 10036-4402
(212) 582-6884
CBM
Certified Ballast Manufacturers
Association
1422 Euclid Ave., Suite 402
Cleveland, OH 44115-2094
(216) 241-0711
CCC
Carpet Cushion Council
P.O. Box 546
Riverside, CT 06878-0546
(203) 637-1312
CDA
Copper Development Association
(800) 232-3282
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-9
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
Inc.
260 Madison Ave., 16th Floor
New York, NY 10016-2401
www.copper.org
(212) 251-7200
CFFA
Chemical Fabrics & Film Association,
Inc.
c/o Thomas Associates, Inc.
1300 Sumner Ave.
Cleveland, OH 44115-2851
www.taol.com/cffa
(216) 241-7333
CGA
Compressed Gas Association
1725 Jefferson Davis Hwy, Suite 1004
Arlington, VA 22202-4102
www.cganet.com
(703) 412-0900
CGSB
Canadian General Standards Board
Place du Portage
Phase III, 6B1
11 Laurier St.
Hull, Quebec K1A 1G6
CANADA
www.pwgsc.gc.ca/cgsb
Mailing Address:
Canadian General Standards Board
Sales Centre
Ottawa K1A 1G5
CANADA
(819) 956-3500
(800) 665-2472
(819) 956-0425
CISCA
Ceilings and Interior Systems
Construction Association
1500 Lincoln Hwy, Suite 202
St. Charles, IL 60174
www.cisca.org
(630) 584-1919
CISPI
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
5959 Shallowford Rd., Suite 419
Chattanooga, TN 37421
(423) 892-0137
CLFMI
Chain Link Fence Manufacturers
Institute
9891 Broken Land Pkwy, Suite 300
Columbia, MD 21046
(301) 596-2584
CPPA
Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe
Association
432 N. Superior St.
Toledo, OH 43604
(800) 510-2772
(419) 241-2221
CRI
Carpet and Rug Institute
310 S. Holiday, Ave.
Dalton, GA 30722-2048
www.carpet-rug.com
(800) 882-8846
(706) 278-3176
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-10
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
CRSI
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
933 N. Plum Grove Rd.
Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758
www.crsi.org
(847) 517-1200
CSSB
Cedar Shake and Shingle Bureau
515 116th Ave., NE, Suite 275
Bellevue, WA 98004-5294
(206) 453-1323
CTI
Ceramic Tile Institute of America
12061 West Jefferson Blvd.
Culver City, CA 90230-6219
(310) 574-7800
CTI
Cooling Tower Institute
P.O. Box 73383
Houston, TX 77273
(281) 583-4087
DASMA
Door and Access Systems Manufacturers
Association, International
(Formerly: National Association of
Garage Door Manufacturers)
c/o Thomas Associates, Inc.
1300 Sumner Ave.
Cleveland, OH 44115-2851
www.taol.com/dasma
(216) 241-7333
DHI
Door and Hardware Institute
(Formerly: National Builders
Hardware Association)
14170 Newbrook Dr.
Chantilly, VA 20151-2223
www.dhi.org
(703) 222-2010
DIPRA
Ductile Iron Pipe Research
Association
245 Riverchase Pkwy East, Suite O
Birmingham, AL 35244
(205) 988-9870
DLPA
Decorative Laminate Products
Association
(Dissolved in 1995 - Now part of
KCMA.)
ECSA
Exchange Carriers Standards
Association
(See ATIS)
EIA
Electronic Industries Association
2500 Wilson Blvd.
Arlington, VA 22201
(703) 907-7500
EIMA
EIFS Industry Members Association
402 N. Fourth St., Suite 102
Yakima, WA 98901-2470
www.eifsfacts.com
(800) 294-3462
(509) 457-3500
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-11
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
EJMA
Expansion Joint Manufacturers
Association
25 N. Broadway
Tarrytown, NY 10591-3201
ETL
ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc.
(Now part of ITS)
FCI
Fluid Controls Institute
c/o Thomas Associates, Inc
1300 Sumner Ave.
Cleveland, OH 44115-2851
www.taol.com/fci
(216) 241-7333
FCICA
Floor Covering Installation
Contractors Association
(Formerly: Floor Covering
Installation Board)
P.O. Box 948
Dalton, GA 30722-0948
(706) 226-5488
FGMA
Flat Glass Marketing Association
(See GANA)
FM
Factory Mutual System
1151 Boston-Providence Tnpk.
P.O. Box 9102
Norwood, MA 02062-9102
www.factorymutual.com
(781) 762-4300
FTI
Facing Tile Institute
c/o Stark Ceramics
P.O. Box 8880
Canton, OH 44711
(330) 488-1211
GA
Gypsum Association
810 First St., NE, Suite 510
Washington, DC 20002
www.usg.com
(202) 289-5440
GBI
Green Building Initiative
2104 SE Morrison,
Portland, Oregon 97214
Email: [email protected]
(877) GBI-GBI1
GANA
Glass Association of North America
(Formerly: Flat Glass Marketing
Association)
3310 SW Harrison St.
Topeka, KS 66611-2279
www.glasswebsite.com/gana
(913) 266-7013
GRI
Geosynthetic Research Institute
33rd and Lancaster Walk
(215) 895-2343
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-12
(914) 332-0040
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
Rush Building, West Wing
Philadelphia, PA 19104
www.gri-server.coe.drexel.edu
HEI
Heat Exchange Institute
c/o Thomas Associates, Inc.
1300 Sumner Ave.
Cleveland, OH 44115-2851
www.taol.com/hei
(216) 241-7333
HI
Hydraulic Institute
9 Sylvan Way
Parsippany, NJ 07054-3802
(201) 267-9700
HI
Hydronics Institute
Division of Gas Appliance
Manufacturers Association
P.O. Box 218
35 Russo Pl.
Berkeley Heights, NJ 07922
www.gamanet.org
(908) 464-8200
HMA
Hardwood Manufacturers Association
(Formerly: Southern Hardwood Lumber
Manufacturers Association)
400 Penn Center Blvd., Suite 530
Pittsburgh, PA 15235-5605
www.hardwood.org
(412) 829-0770
HPVA
Hardwood Plywood and Veneer
Association
1825 Michael Farraday Dr.
P.O. Box 2789
Reston, VA 22195-0789
www.hpva.org
(703) 435-2900
IAS
International Approval Services
8504 East Pleasant Valley Rd.
Cleveland, OH 44131
www.iasapprovals.org
(216) 524-4990
IBD
Institute of Business Designers
(Now part of IIDA)
ICEA
Insulated Cable Engineers
Association, Inc.
P.O. Box 440
South Yarmouth, MA 02664
(508) 394-4424
IEC
International Electrotechnical
Commission
(Available from ANSI)
11 West 42nd St., 13th Floor
New York, NY 10036-8002
(212) 642-4900
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-13
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers
345 E. 47th St.
New York, NY 10017-2394
www.ieee.org
(800) 678-4333
(212) 705-7900
IESNA
Illuminating Engineering Society of
North America
120 Wall St., 17th Floor
New York, NY 10005-4001
www.iesna.org
(212) 248-5000
IGCC
Insulating Glass Certification
Council
(Now part of ITS)
IIDA
International Interior Design
Association
341 Merchandise Mart
Chicago, IL 60654-1104
(312) 467-1950
ILI
Indiana Limestone Institute of
America
Stone City Bank Building, Suite 400
Bedford, IN 47421
(812) 275-4426
IMSA
International Municipal Signal
Association
P.O. Box 539
165 E. Union St.
Newark, NY 14513
(800) 723-4672
(315) 331-2182
INCE
Institute of Noise Control
Engineering
P.O. Box 3206, Arlington Branch
Poughkeepsie, NY 12603
(914) 462-4006
IRI
Industrial Risk Insurers
P.O. Box 5010
85 Woodland St.
Hartford, CT 06102-5010
(860) 520-7300
ISA
ISA - International Society for
Measurement and Control
P.O. Box 12277
67 Alexander Dr.
Research Triangle Park, NC 27709
www.isa.org
(919) 549-8411
ISS
Iron and Steel Society
410 Commonwealth Dr.
Warrendale, PA 15086-7512
www.issource.org
(412) 776-1535
ISWA
Insect Screening Weavers Association
(914) 962-9052
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-14
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
P.O. Box 1018
Ossining, NY 10562
ITS
Intertek Testing Services
(Formerly: Inchcape Testing
Services)
P.O. Box 2040
3933 US Route 11
Cortland, NY 13045-7902
www.itsglobal.com
(800) 345-3851
(607) 753-6711
KCMA
Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers
Association
(Formerly: National Kitchen Cabinet
Association)
1899 Preston White Dr.
Reston, VA 22091-4326
www.kema.org
(703) 264-1690
LGSI
Light Gage Structural Institute
c/o Loseke Technologies, Inc.
P.O. Box 560746
The Colony, TX 75056
(972) 625-4560
LIA
Lead Industries Association, Inc.
295 Madison Ave.
New York, NY 10017
www.leadinfo.com
(800) 422-5323
(212) 578-4750
LMA
Laminating Materials Association
(Formerly: American Laminators
Association)
116 Lawrence St.
Hillsdale, NJ 07642-2730
www.lma.org
(201) 664-2700
LPI
Lightning Protection Institute
3335 N. Arlington Heights Rd., Suite
E
Arlington Heights, IL 60004-7700
(800) 488-6864
(847) 577-7200
MBMA
Metal Building Manufacturer's
Association
c/o Thomas Associates, Inc.
1300 Sumner Ave.
Cleveland, OH 44115-2851
www.taol.com/mbma
(216) 241-7333
MCAA
Mechanical Contractors Association of
America
1385 Piccard Dr.
Rockville, MD 20850-4329
(301) 869-5800
MFMA
Maple Flooring Manufacturers
(847) 480-9138
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-15
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
Association
60 Revere Dr., Suite 500
Northbrook, IL 60062
www.maplefloor.com
MFMA
Metal Framing Manufacturers
Association
(Formerly: Wood and Synthetic
Flooring Institute)
401 N. Michigan Ave.
Chicago, IL 60611
(312) 644-6610
MHI
Material Handling Institute
(A Division of the Material Handling
Industry)
8720 Red Oak Blvd., Suite 201
Charlotte, NC 28217-3992
www.mhi.org
(800) 345-1815
(704) 522-8644
MIA
Marble Institute of America
30 Eden Alley, Suite 301
Columbus, OH 43215
www.marble-institute.com
(614) 228-6194
MIA
Masonry Institute of America
2550 Beverly Blvd.
Los Angeles, CA 90057
www.masonryinstitute.org
(213) 388-0472
ML/SFA
Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association
(A Division of the NAAMM)
8 South Michigan Ave., Suite 1000
Chicago, IL 60603
(312) 456-5590
MRCA
Midwest Roofing Contractors
Association
4840 W. 15th St., Suite 1000
Lawrence, KS 66049
(800) 879-4448
(913) 843-4888
MSS
Manufacturers Standardization Society
of the Valve and Fittings Industry
127 Park St., NE
Vienna, VA 22180-4602
(703) 281-6613
NAA
National Arborist Association
P.O. Box 1094
Amherst, NH 03031-1094
www.natlarb.com
(800) 733-2622
(603) 673-3311
NAAMM
National Association of Architectural
Metal Manufacturers
8 South Michigan Ave., Suite 1000
Chicago, IL 60603
www.gss.net/naamm
(312) 456-5590
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-16
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
NAGDM
National Association of Garage Door
Manufacturers
(See DASMA)
NAIMA
North American Insulation
Manufacturers Association
(Formerly: Thermal Insulation
Manufacturers Association)
44 Canal Center Plaza, Suite 310
Alexandria, VA 22314
www.naima.org
(703) 684-0084
NAMI
National Accreditation & Management
Institute, Inc.
P.O. Box 366
207 S. Washington St.
Berkeley Springs, WV 25411
(304) 258-5100
NAPA
National Asphalt Pavement Association
NAPA Building
5100 Forbes Blvd.
Lanham, MD 20706-4413
(301) 731-4748
NAPM
National Association of Photographic
Manufacturers
550 Mamaroneck Ave.
Harrison, NY 10528
(914) 698-7603
NBHA
National Builders Hardware
Association
(See DHI)
NCAC
National Council of Acoustical
Consultants
P.O. Box 359
66 Morris Ave., Suite 1A
Springfield, NJ 07081
(201) 564-5859
NCCA
National Coil Coaters Association
401 N. Michigan Ave.
Chicago, IL 60611
(312) 321-6894
NCMA
National Concrete Masonry Association
2302 Horse Pen Rd.
Herndon, VA 20171-3499
www.ncma.org
(703) 713-1900
NCPI
National Clay Pipe Institute
P.O. Box 759
253-80 Center St.
Lake Geneva, WI 53147
(414) 248-9094
NCRPM
National Council on Radiation
Protection and Measurements
7910 Woodmont Ave., Suite 800
(800) 229-2652
(301) 657-2652
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-17
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
Bethesda, MD 20814-3095
www.ncrp.com
NCSPA
National Corrugated Steel Pipe
Association
1255 23rd St., NW, Suite 850
Washington, DC 20037
www.ncspa.org
(202) 452-1700
NEBB
Natural Environmental Balancing
Bureau
8575 Grovemont Circle
Gaithersburg, MD 20877-4121
(301) 977-3698
NECA
National Electrical Contractors
Association
3 Bethesda Metro Center, Suite 1100
Bethesda, MD 20814-5372
(301) 657-3110
NEI
National Elevator Industry
185 Bridge Plaza North, Suite 310
Fort Lee, NJ 07024
(201) 944-3211
NELMA
Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers
Association
272 Tuttle Rd.
P.O. Box 87A
Cumberland Center, ME 04021
(207) 829-6901
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers
Association
1300 N 17th St., Suite 1847
Rosslyn, VA 22209
www.nema.org
(703) 841-3200
NETA
InterNational Electrical Testing
Association
P.O. Box 687
106 Stone St.
Morrison, CO 80465-1526
www.electricnet.com/neta
(303) 697-8441
NFPA
National Fire Protection
Association
One Batterymarch Park
P.O. Box 9101
Quincy, MA 02269-9101
www.nfpa.org
(800) 344-3555
(617) 770-3000
NFPA
National Forest Products Association
(See AFPA)
NFRC
National Fenestration Rating Council
Incorporated
1300 Spring St., Suite 120
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-18
(301) 589-NFRC
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
Silver Spring, MD 20910
www.nfrc.org
NHLA
National Hardwood Lumber Association
P.O. Box 34518
Memphis, TN 38184-0518
www.natlhardwood.org
(901) 377-1818
NIA
National Insulation Association
(Formerly: National Insulation and
Abatement Contractors Association)
99 Canal Center Plaza, Suite 222
Alexandria, VA 22314
www.insulation.org
(703) 683-6422
NIAC
National Insulation and Abatement
Contractors Association
(See NIA)
NKCA
National Kitchen Cabinet Association
(See KCMA)
NLGA
National Lumber Grades Authority
#406-First Capital Pl.,
960 Quayside Dr.
New Westminster, BC V3M 6G2
(604) 524-2393
NOFMA
National Oak Flooring Manufacturers
Association
P.O. Box 3009
Memphis, TN 38173-0009
(901) 526-5016
NPA
National Particleboard Association
18928 Premiere Ct.
Gaithersburg, MD 20879-1569
www.pbmdf.com
(301) 670-0604
NPCA
National Paint and Coatings
Association
1500 Rhode Island Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20005-5597
www.paint.org
(202) 462-6272
NRCA
National Roofing Contractors
Association
O'Hare International Center
10255 W. Higgins Rd., Suite 600
Rosemont, IL 60018-5607
www.roofonline.org
(800) 323-9545
(847) 299-9070
NRMCA
National Ready Mixed
Concrete Association
900 Spring St.
Silver Spring, MD 20910
www.nrmca.org
(301) 587-1400
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-19
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
NSA
National Stone Association
1415 Elliot Pl., NW
Washington, DC 20007
www.aggregates.org
(202) 342-1100
NSF
NSF International
(Formerly: National Sanitation
Foundation)
P.O. Box 130140
Ann Arbor, MI 48113-0140
www.nsf.org
(313) 769-8010
NSSEA
National School Supply and
Equipment Association
8300 Colesville Rd., Suite 250
Silver Spring, MD 20910
(800) 395-5550
(301) 495-0240
NTMA
National Terrazzo and Mosaic
Association
3166 Des Plaines Ave., Suite 121
Des Plaines, IL 60018
www.ntma.com
(800) 323-9736
(847) 635-7744
NUSIG
National Uniform Seismic Installation
Guidelines
12 Lahoma Ct.
Alamo, CA 94526
(510) 946-0135
NWMA
National Woodwork Manufacturers
Association
(See NWWDA)
NWWDA
National Wood Window and Door
Association
(Formerly: National Woodwork
Manufacturers Association)
1400 E. Touhy Ave., G-54
Des Plaines, IL 60018
www.nwwda.org
(800) 223-2301
(847) 299-5200
PATMI
Power Actuated Tool Manufacturers'
Institute, Inc.
1603 Boonslick Rd.
St. Charles, MO 63301-2244
(314) 947-6610
PCA
Portland Cement Association
5420 Old Orchard Rd.
Skokie, IL 60077-1083
www.portcement.org
(847) 966-6200
PCI
Precast/Prestressed Concrete
Institute
175 W. Jackson Blvd.
Chicago, IL 60604
(312) 786-0300
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-20
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
www.pci.org
PDCA
Painting and Decorating
Contractors of America
3913 Old Lee Hwy, Suite 33-B
Fairfax, VA 22030
www.pdca.com
(800) 332-7322
(703) 359-0826
PDI
Plumbing and Drainage Institute
45 Bristol Dr., Suite 101
South Easton, MA 02375
(800) 589-8956
(508) 230-3516
PEI
Porcelain Enamel Institute
4004 Hillsboro Pike, Suite 224-B
Nashville, TN 37215
www.porcelainenamel.com
(615) 385-5357
PGI
PVC Geomembrane Institute
P.O. Box 4226
Traverse City, MI 49685
users.aol.com/forPVC1
(616) 933-6373
PPFA
Plastic Pipe and Fittings Association
800 Roosevelt Rd., Building C, Suite
20
Glen Ellyn, IL 60137-5833
(630) 858-6540
PPI
Plastic Pipe Institute
(The Society of the Plastics
Industry, Inc.)
1801 K St., NW, Suite 600L
Washington, DC 20006
www.plasticpipe.org
(202) 974-5306
RCMA
Roof Coatings Manufacturers
Association
Center Park
4041 Powder Mill Rd., Suite 404
Calverton, MD 20705
(301) 230-2501
RCSC
Research Council on Structural
Connections
Sargent & Lundy
55 E. Monroe St.
Chicago, IL 60603
(312) 269-2424
RFCI
Resilient Floor Covering Institute
966 Hungerford Dr., Suite 12-B
Rockville, MD 20850-1714
(301) 340-8580
RMA
Rubber Manufacturers Association
1400 K St., NW, Suite 900
Washington, DC 20005
www.rma.org
(800) 220-7620
(202) 682-4800
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-21
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
SAE
SAE International
400 Commonwealth Dr.
Warrendale, PA 15096-0001
For publications: Call
(412) 776-4970
(412) 776-4841
SDI
Steel Deck Institute
P.O. Box 25
Fox River Grove, IL 60021
www.sdi.org
(847) 462-1930
SDI
Steel Door Institute
30200 Detroit Rd.
Cleveland, OH 44145-1967
(216) 889-0010
SEFA
Scientific Equipment and Furniture
Association
1028 Duchess Dr.
McLean, VA 22102-2010
www.sefalabfurn.com
(703) 790-8661
SEGD
Society for Environmental Graphic
Design
401 F St., NW, Suite 333
Washington, DC 20001-2728
(202) 638-5555
SGCC
Safety Glazing Certification Council
(Now part of ITS)
SHLMA
Southern Hardwood Lumber
Manufacturers Association
(See HMA)
SIGMA
Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers
Association
401 N. Michigan Ave.
Chicago, IL 60611-4267
(312) 644-6610
SJI
Steel Joist Institute
3127 10th Ave., North Ext.
Myrtle Beach, SC 29577-6760
(803) 626-1995
SMA
Screen Manufacturers Association
2850 S. Ocean Blvd., Suite 114
Palm Beach, FL 33480-5535
(561) 533-0991
SMACNA
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association,
Inc.
4201 Lafayette Center Dr.
P.O. Box 221230
Chantilly, VA 20151-1209
www.smacna.org
(703) 803-2980
SPI
Society of the Plastics Industry,
(800) 951-2001
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-22
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
Inc.
Spray Polyurethane Division
1801 K St., NW, Suite 600K
Washington, DC 20006
www.socplas.org
(202) 974-5200
SPIB
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau
4709 Scenic Hwy
Pensacola, FL 32504-9094
(904) 434-2611
SPRI
SPRI
(Formerly: Single Ply Roofing
Institute)
175 Highland Ave.
Needham Heights, MA 02194-3034
(617) 444-0242
SSINA
Specialty Steel Industry of North
America
c/o Collier, Shannon Rill & Scott
3050 K St., NW, Suite 400
Washington, DC 20007
www.ssina.com
(800) 982-0355
(202) 342-8630
SSPC
Steel Structures Painting Council
40 24th St., 6th Floor
Pittsburgh, PA 15222-4643
(412) 281-2331
SSPMA
Sump and Sewage Pump Manufacturers
Association
P.O. Box 647
Northbrook, IL 60065-0647
(847) 559-9233
STI
Steel Tank Institute
570 Oakwood Rd.
Lake Zurich, IL 60047-1559
(847) 438-8265
SWI
Steel Window Institute
c/o Thomas Associates, Inc.
1300 Sumner Ave.
Cleveland, OH 44115-2851
www.taol.com/swi
(216) 241-7333
SWPA
Submersible Wastewater Pump
Association
1806 Johns Dr.
Glenview, IL 60025-1657
(847) 729-7972
SWRI
Sealant, Waterproofing and
Restoration Institute
2841 Main
Kansas City, MO 64108
(816) 472-7974
TCA
Tile Council of America
100 Clemson Research Blvd.
(864) 646-8453
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-23
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
Anderson, SC 29625
TIMA
Thermal Insulation Manufacturers
Association
(See NAIMA)
TPI
Truss Plate Institute
(Formerly: American Sod Producers
Association)
583 D'Onofrio Dr., Suite 200
Madison, WI 53719
(608) 833-5900
TPI
Turfgrass Producers International
(Formerly: American Sod Producers
Association)
1855-A Hicks Rd.
Rolling Meadows, IL 60008
(800) 405-8873
(847) 705-9898
UL
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
333 Pfingsten Rd.
Northbrook, IL 60062
www.ul.com
(800) 704-4050
(847) 272-8800
UNI
Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association
2655 Villa Creek Dr., Suite 155
Dallas, TX 75234
www.members.aol.com/unibell1
(972) 243-3902
USITT
USITT: The American Association
of Design and Production
Professionals in the Performing
Arts
6443 Ridings Rd.
Syracuse, NY 13206-1111
(800) 938-7488
(315) 463-6463
USP
U.S. Pharmacopeia
(Formerly: U.S. Pharmacopoeial
Convention)
12601 Twinbrook Pkwy
Rockville, MD 20852-1790
(800) 227-8772
(301) 881-0666
WA
Wallcoverings Association
401 N. Michigan Ave.
Chicago, IL 60611-4267
(312) 644-6610
WCLIB
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
P.O. Box 23145
Portland, OR 97281-3145
(503) 639-0651
WCMA
Window Covering Manufacturers
Association
(Formerly: American Window Covering
Manufacturers Association)
355 Lexington Ave., 17th Floor
New York, NY 10017-6603
(212) 661-4261
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-24
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
WEF
Water Environment Federation
(Formerly: Water Pollution Control
Federation)
601 Wythe St.
Alexandria, VA 22314-1994
(703) 684-2400
WIC
Woodwork Institute of California
P.O. Box 980247
West Sacramento, CA 95798-0247
(916) 372-9943
WMMPA
Wood Moulding & Millwork
Producers Association
507 First St.
Woodland, CA 95695
www.wmmpa.com
(800) 550-7889
(916) 661-9591
WPCF
Water Pollution Control Federation
(See WEF)
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-25
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
G.
07/09/2010
WRI
Wire Reinforcement Institute
203 Loudoun St., SW
Leesburg, VA 20175-2718
(703) 779-2339
WSC
Water Systems Council
Building C, Suite 20
800 Roosevelt Rd.
Glen Ellyn, IL 60137
(630) 545-1762
WSFI
Wood and Synthetic Flooring Institute
(See MFMA)
WWPA
Western Wood Products Association
Yeon Building
522 SW 5th Ave.
Portland, OR 97204-2122
(503) 224-3930
Federal Government Agencies: Names and titles of Federal Government standards- or specificationproducing agencies are often abbreviated. The following abbreviations and acronyms referenced in the
Contract Documents indicate names of standards- or specification-producing agencies of the Federal
Government. Names and addresses are subject to change and are believed, but are not assured, to be
accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CE
Corps of Engineers
(U.S. Department of the Army)
20 Massachusetts Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20314
CRD standards are available from:
U.S. Army Corps of Engineers
Waterways Experiment Station
Technical Report Distribution Section
Services Branch, TIC
3909 Halls Ferry Rd.
Vicksburg, MS 39180-6199
(202) 761-0660
(601) 634-2696
CFR
Code of Federal Regulations
(Available from the Government
Printing Office)
Washington, DC 20401
(Material is usually published first
in the "Federal Register.")
www.access.gpo.gov
(202) 512-0000
CPSC
Consumer Product Safety Commission
East West Towers
4330 East-West Hwy
Bethesda, MD 20814
(800) 638-2772
CS
Commercial Standard
(U.S. Department of Commerce)
Government Printing Office
Washington, DC 20402
For Commercial standards, contact:
(202) 512-1800
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-26
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
Ms. Brenda Umberger
CS & PS Specialist
c/o NIST
Gaithersburg, MD 20899
(301) 975-4036
DOC
Department of Commerce
14th St. and Constitution Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20230
(202) 482-2000
DOT
Department of Transportation
400 Seventh St., SW
Washington, DC 20590
(202) 366-4000
EPA
Environmental Protection Agency
401 M St., SW
Washington, DC 20460
(202) 260-2090
FAA
Federal Aviation Administration
(U.S. Department of Transportation)
800 Independence Ave., SW
Washington, DC 20591
(202) 366-4000
FCC
Federal Communications Commission
1919 M St., NW
Washington, DC 20554
(202) 418-0126
FDA
Food and Drug Administration
5600 Fishers Lane
Rockville, MD 20857
(301) 443-1544
FHA
Federal Housing Administration
(U.S. Department of Housing and Urban
Development)
451 Seventh St., SW
Washington, DC 20410
(202) 401-0388
FS
Federal Specification Unit
(Available from GSA)
470 East L'Enfant Plaza, SW, Suite
8100
Washington, DC 20407
(202) 619-8925
GSA
General Services Administration
F St. and 18th St., NW
Washington, DC 20405
(202) 708-5082
MIL
Military Standardization Documents
(U.S. Department of Defense)
Defense Printing Service
700 Robbins Ave., Building 4D
Philadelphia, PA 19111
(215) 697-2179
NIST
National Institute of Standards and
Technology
(U.S. Department of Commerce)
(301) 975-2000
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-27
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
Building 101, #A1134,
Rte. I-270 and Quince Orchard Rd.
Gaithersburg, MD 20899
1.05
A.
1.06
A.
OSHA
Occupational Safety and Health
Administration
(U.S. Department of Labor)
200 Constitution Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20210
(202) 219-8148
PS
Product Standard of NBS
(U.S. Department of Commerce)
Government Printing Office
Washington, DC 20402
For Product standards, contact:
Ms. Brenda Umberger
CS & PS Specialist
c/o NIST
Gaithersburg, MD 20899
(202) 512-1800
(301) 975-4036
RUS
Rural Utilities Service
(Formerly: Rural Electrification
Administration)
(U.S. Department of Agriculture)
14th St. and Independence Ave., SW
Washington, DC 20250
(202) 720-9560
TRB
Transportation Research Board,
National Research Council
2101 Constitution Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20418
(202) 334-2934
USDA
U.S. Department of Agriculture
14th St. and Independence Ave., SW
Washington, DC 20250
(202) 720-8732
USPS
U.S. Postal Service
475 L'Enfant Plaza, SW
Washington, DC 20260-0010
(202) 268-2000
GOVERNING REGULATIONS AND AUTHORITIES
Copies of Regulations: Obtain copies of the following regulations and retain at the Project site to be
available for reference by parties who have a reasonable need:
SUBMITTALS
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments,
judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards
and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-28
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 014219
REFERENCE STANDARDS
014219-29
This page left intentionally blank
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
SECTION 014500
QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 and other Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality-control services.
B.
Quality-control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed by
Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. They do not include contract
enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C.
Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated.
These services do not relieve the Prime Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract
Document requirements.
D.
Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation procedures, not production
of standard products.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
2.
1.03
A.
Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the
Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production
of standard products.
Specified inspections, tests, and related actions do not limit Prime Contractor's quality-control
procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements.
Requirements for Prime Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Architect,
Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" specifies requirements for repair and restoration of
construction disturbed by inspection and testing activities.
Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" specifies requirements for development of a schedule
of required tests and inspections.
RESPONSIBILITIES
Prime Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated as the responsibility of another identified
entity, Prime Contractors shall provide inspections, tests, and other quality-control services specified
elsewhere in the Contract Documents and required by authorities having jurisdiction. Costs for these
services are included in the Contract Sum.
1.
Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and other qualitycontrol services are the Prime Contractor's responsibility, the Prime Contractor shall employ and
pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform quality-control services. Costs for these
services are included in the Contract Sum.
QUALITY CONTROL
014500-1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
2.
Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and other qualitycontrol services are the Owner's responsibility, the Owner will employ and pay a qualified
independent testing agency to perform those services.
a.
B.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.
3.
A.
The agency shall notify the Architect and the Prime Contractor promptly of irregularities or
deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
The agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements of the Contract
Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work.
The agency shall not perform any duties of the Prime Contractor.
Coordination: Coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum
of delay. Coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to
accommodate inspections and tests.
1.
1.04
Provide access to the Work.
Furnish incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests.
Take adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assist the
agency in taking samples.
Provide facilities for storage and curing of test samples.
Deliver samples to testing laboratories.
Provide the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that
require control by the testing agency.
Provide security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project Site.
Duties of the Testing Agency: The independent agency engaged to perform inspections, sampling, and
testing of materials and construction specified in individual Sections shall cooperate with the Architect
and the Prime Contractor in performance of the agency's duties. The testing agency shall provide
qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests.
1.
E.
The cost of retesting construction, revised or replaced by the Prime Contractor, is the Prime
Contractor's responsibility where required tests performed on original construction indicated
noncompliance with Contract Document requirements.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests, and similar
services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in
advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Where the Owner has engaged a testing agency for testing and inspecting part of the Work,
and the Contractor is also required to engage an entity for the same or related element, the
Contractor shall not employ the entity engaged by the Owner, unless agreed to in writing
by the Owner.
Retesting: The Prime Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of inspections, tests, or other
quality-control services prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with Contract Document
requirements, regardless of whether the original test was Contractor's responsibility.
1.
C.
07/09/2010
The Owner is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples, and similar
activities.
SUBMITTALS
Unless the Prime Contractor is responsible for this service, the independent testing agency shall submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar service to the Architect. If the
Prime Contractor is responsible for the service, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each
QUALITY CONTROL
014500-2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
inspection, test, or similar service through the Contractor.
1.
Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority, when the
authority so directs.
2.
Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test, or similar service include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
1.05
A.
Date of issue.
Project title and number.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
Names of individuals making the inspection or test.
Designation of the Work and test method.
Identification of product and Specification Section.
Complete inspection or test data.
Test results and an interpretation of test results.
Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing.
Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work complies with
Contract Document requirements.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
Recommendations on retesting.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service agencies, including
independent testing laboratories, that are prequalified as complying with the American Council of
Independent Laboratories' "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" and
that specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed.
1.
Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project shall be authorized by
authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the state where the Project is located.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A.
General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services, repair damaged
construction and restore substrates and finishes. Comply with Contract Document requirements for
Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
B.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities, and protect repaired construction.
C.
Repair and protection is Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for
inspection, testing, or similar services.
END OF SECTION 014500
QUALITY CONTROL
014500-3
This page left intentionally blank
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
SECTION 015200
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 and other Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes requirements for construction facilities and temporary controls, including
temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection.
B.
Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
D.
A.
1.04
A.
Temporary project identification signs and bulletin boards.
Waste disposal services.
Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.03
Water service and distribution.
Temporary light.
Temporary heat.
Ventilation.
Telephone service.
Sanitary facilities, including drinking water.
Storm and sanitary sewer.
Temporary fire protection.
Barricades, warning signs, and lights.
Environmental protection.
SUBMITTALS
Temporary Utilities: Submit reports, field tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar procedures
performed on temporary utilities.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Building code requirements.
Health and safety regulations.
Utility company regulations.
Police, fire department, and rescue squad rules.
Environmental protection regulations.
State and Federal laws.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
015200-1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
B.
Standards: Comply with NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and
Demolition Operations," ANSI A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and
Demolition," and NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities."
1.
C.
1.05
07/09/2010
Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service in compliance with NFPA 70 "National Electric Code."
Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before
use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule indicating dates for implementation and termination of each
temporary utility. At the earliest feasible time, when acceptable to the Owner, change over from use of
temporary service to use of permanent service. Inform Owner minimum 24 hours in advance of any
planned interruptions to utility service.
B.
Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a
safe and efficient manner. Relocate temporary services and facilities as the Work progresses. Do not
overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress. Take necessary fire-prevention measures.
Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist
on-site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide new materials only as required. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use
undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition. Provide materials suitable for use
intended.
B.
Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry."
1.
2.
3.
C.
For signs and directory boards, provide exterior-type, Grade B-B high-density overlay fireretardant plywood of sizes and thicknesses indicated.
For fences and vision barriers, provide minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick exterior fire-retardant
plywood, painted to color acceptable to Owner.
For safety barriers, sidewalk bridges, and similar uses, provide minimum 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) thick
exterior fire-retardant plywood.
Paint: Comply with requirements of Division 9 Section "Painting."
1.
2.
For job-built temporary fences, and other exposed lumber and plywood, provide exterior-grade
acrylic-latex emulsion over exterior primer.
For sign panels and applying graphics, provide exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior
primer.
D.
Tarpaulins: Provide waterproof, fire-resistant, UL-labeled tarpaulins with flame-spread rating of 15 or
less. For temporary enclosures, provide translucent, nylon-reinforced, laminated polyethylene or
polyvinyl chloride, fire-retardant tarpaulins.
E.
Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
015200-2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
F.
2.02
07/09/2010
Open-Mesh Fencing with fabric liners only as applicable to conform to applicable law.
EQUIPMENT
A.
Job trailer: Provide for duration of construction from mobilization though substantial completion and
punch list completion.
B.
General: Provide new equipment only as required. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use
undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition. Provide equipment suitable for use
intended.
C.
Water Hoses: Provide 3/4-inch (19-mm), heavy-duty, abrasion-resistant, flexible rubber hoses 100 feet
(30 m) long, with pressure rating greater than the maximum pressure of the water distribution system.
Provide adjustable shutoff nozzles at hose discharge.
D.
Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to
120-Volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground-fault circuit
interrupters, reset button, and pilot light for connection of power tools and equipment.
E.
Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords. Use hard-service cords where exposed to
abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords if single
lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe lengthvoltage ratio.
F.
Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage required for adequate
illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered-glass enclosures where exposed to breakage. Provide
exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture.
G.
Temporary Toilet Units: Provide self-contained, single-occupant toilet units of the chemical, aerated
recirculation, or combustion type. Provide units properly vented and fully enclosed with a glass-fiberreinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material.
H.
Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class A fire extinguishers for temporary
offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class ABC, drychemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for the
exposures.
1.
Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by
location and class of fire exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Use qualified personnel for installation and required permitting of temporary facilities. Locate facilities
where they will serve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the
Work and surrounding habitat. Relocate and modify facilities as required.
B.
Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do
not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent
facilities.
3.02
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
015200-3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
A.
07/09/2010
General: Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing
service. Where company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching,
compatible materials and equipment. Comply with company recommendations.
1.
2.
3.
Arrange with company and existing users for a time when service can be interrupted, if necessary,
to make connections for temporary services.
Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Prior to temporary utility availability,
provide trucked-in services.
Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to the site where the Owner's easements cannot be
used for that purpose.
B.
Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to the Owner or Architect
except for electrical power costs which shall be provided by the Owner. Neither the Owner nor Architect
will accept cost or use charges as a basis of claims for Change Orders.
C.
Toilets: Provide portable toilet facilities on site in location acceptable to Land Developer and Owner.
D.
Drinking-Water Facilities:
including paper supply.
E.
Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary connections to remove effluent that can be discharged lawfully.
1.
2.
3.
3.03
A.
Provide containerized, tap-dispenser, bottled-water drinking-water units,
Filter out excessive amounts of soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils, and similar contaminants
that might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge.
Connect temporary sewers to the municipal system, as directed by sewer department officials.
Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. Following heavy
use, restore normal conditions promptly.
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
Locate storage sheds, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access.
1.
Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove prior to Substantial
Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use
permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to the Owner.
B.
Provide incombustible construction for sheds located within the construction area or within 30 feet (9 m)
of building lines. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241.
C.
Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Install secure storage and fabrication sheds sized, furnished, and
equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility service.
D.
Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and
completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Install tarpaulins securely, with incombustible wood framing and other materials. Close openings
of 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m) or less with plywood or similar materials.
Close openings through floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with load-bearing, fireretardant wood-framed construction.
Where temporary wood or plywood enclosure exceeds 100 sq. ft. (9.2 sq. m) in area, use ULlabeled, fire-retardant-treated material for framing and main sheathing.
Temporary Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting materials and employees. Truck cranes and
similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
015200-4
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
facilities.
F.
Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Install and remove project identification, directional and
other signs of size indicated and required for partially utilized facility operation. Install signs where
indicated to inform the public and persons seeking entrance to the Project. Support on posts or framing
of preservative-treated wood or steel. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs.
1.
2.
Project Identification Signs: 4’x8’ who shall engage an experienced sign producer to apply
graphics. Electronic file for the sign shall be prepared by the Contractor.
Temporary Signs: Prepare signs to provide directional information to construction personnel,
occupied facility users and visitors.
G.
Temporary Exterior Lighting: Install exterior yard and sign lights so signs are visible when Work is
being performed.
I.
Collection and Disposal of Waste: Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere daily. Comply
with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material and debris and specification
Section 017419. Enforce requirements strictly. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal
weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). Handle
hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing
properly. Dispose of material lawfully.
3.04
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Except for use of permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change over from use of
temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion, or
longer, as requested by the Architect.
B.
Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of the types needed
to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 10 "Standard
for Portable Fire Extinguishers" and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations,
and Demolition Operations."
1.
2.
3.
4.
Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but not less
than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell.
Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations.
Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire-protection
facilities, stairways, and other access routes for fighting fires. Prohibit smoking at all Project
inside locations.
Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition.
C.
Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erection of
structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform
personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against. Where appropriate and needed, provide
lighting, including flashing red or amber lights.
D.
Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure of partially completed areas of
construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar
violations of security.
1.
Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value or attractive for theft,
provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with the installation and release of
material to minimize the opportunity for theft and vandalism.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
015200-5
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
E.
3.05
07/09/2010
Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in
ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air,
waterways, and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted or that other undesirable effects might result.
Avoid use of tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise-making tools and
equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site.
OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A.
Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability of temporary
facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse.
B.
Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage by
freezing temperatures and similar elements.
1.
2.
C.
Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and
similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid
possibility of damage.
Protection: Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines.
Protect from damage during excavation operations.
Termination and Removal: Unless the Owner or Architect requests that it be maintained longer, remove
each temporary facility when the need has ended, when replaced by authorized use of a permanent
facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent
construction that may have been delayed because of interference with the temporary facility. Repair
damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1.
2.
Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving.
Where the area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not
comply with requirements for fill or subsoil in the area. Remove materials contaminated with
road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair
growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at the
temporary entrances, as required by the governing authority.
At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate Owner-provided temporary facilities and areas
used during the construction period including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Replace air filters and clean inside of ductwork and housings.
Replace significantly worn parts and parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
Replace lamps burned out or noticeably dimmed by hours of use.
Other damage (excluding normal wear and tear) incurred after Commencement of the
work.
END OF SECTION 015200
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
015200-6
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
SECTION 016000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 and other Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements: selection of products for
use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products;
special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.03
A.
DEFINITIONS
Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from
previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system,"
and terms of similar intent.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Division 1 Section "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. ‘
Division 1 Section "Reference Standards" for applicable industry standards for products specified.
Contract for Construction related to project closeout for submitting warranties for contract
closeout.
Divisions 2 through 30 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and
installations specified to be warranted.
Division 1 Section “Substitution Procedures”.
Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model
number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is
current as of date of the Contract Documents.
New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility,
except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated
otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.
Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or
where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function,
dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that
equal or exceed those of specified product.
Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those
required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
C.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and
accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to
establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical
properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other
named manufacturers.
D.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a
particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
E.
Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to
extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Copies of drawings in digital format will be provided to the Contractor once by the Architect
prior to construction in accordance with the “Authorization Statement for Electronic Transfer” form.
(Example attached herein). Information provided in digital format is for the sole information and use of
the authorizing entity. Further copying or transfer of this information is prohibited by copyright. Costs
for such files as required by Architect and its consultants shall be paid for by the Owner.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction
activities.
1.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and
related activities that require sequential activity.
2.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing
will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.
a.
Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with
other submittals until related submittals are received.
C.
Submittals Schedule: Contractor shall coordinate submittals and time requirements for scheduled
performance of related construction activities.
D.
Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for re-submittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal.
1.
Initial Review: Allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if
processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will
advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2.
If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.
3.
Allow 14 days for processing each re-submittal.
4.
No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals
enough in advance of the Work to permit processing.
E.
Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1.
Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2.
Provide a space approximately 4 by 8 inches (100 by 200 mm) on label or beside title block to
record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
3.
07/09/2010
Submittal tracking number: Mark each submittal with a tracking number as follows:
25-05500-1A
Re-submittal Designation. Use "A" for first re-submittal, "B" for second,
etc.
Submittal sequence number for Specification Section. Use a separate
number for each transmittal, in sequence, for items within each Spec.
Section.
Specification Section.
Transmittal number. Use a separate transmittal for each item or group of
items within the same Section submitted together.
4.
Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a.
Project name.
b.
Date.
c.
Name and address of Architect.
d.
Name and address of Contractor.
e.
Name and address of subcontractor.
f.
Name and address of supplier.
g.
Name of manufacturer.
h.
Submittal tracking number.
i.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
F.
Other necessary identification. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the
Contract Documents on submittals.
G.
Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes
noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
For submittals not requiring raised seal: Post one *.pdf copy of submittal to Architect via County
Primavera Contract Manager interface (provide notification of posting date by Contractor to
Architect).
For submittals requiring raised seal: Submit seven copies of submittal to Architect. Upon
approval, Contractor shall post one scanned *.pdf, *.tiff, or *.jpg copy of submittal to Architect
via County Primavera Contract Manager interface (provide notification of posting date by
Contractor to Architect).
For product samples: Submit three submittals to Architect.
Copies of approved submittals for maintenance manuals and Project Closeout will be made by
Contractor.
All submittals shall have (1) copy returned to Owner for Project records by Contractor after each
review by Architects has been completed. Owner shall sign off on each submittal at this time. For
*.pdf submittals (all except those requiring sign and seal), Contractor shall post the Architect
approved and Owner sign-off submittal to the Primavera Contract Manager interface.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
H.
Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling.
Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review,
received from sources other than Contractor.
1.
On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information,
requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and
deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, including minor variations and
limitations. Include the same label information as the related submittal.
2.
Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with requirements of
the Contract Documents.
3.
Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:
a.
Project name.
b.
Date.
c.
Destination (To:).
d.
Source (From:).
e.
Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
f.
Category and type of submittal.
g.
Submittal purpose and description.
h.
Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
i.
Remarks.
j.
Signature of transmitter.
I.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators,
installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction
activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
J.
Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in
connection with construction.
K.
Substitution Requests: Applicable only if specified products are no longer available or if Contractor
seeks to utilize a product or system that meets all the requirements outlined in the Substitution procedures
noted herein. Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or
installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers
and titles.
1.
2.
Substitution Request Form: Use form provided at end of Section 012500.
Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as
applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.
Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts
of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be
necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the
Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight,
size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
Samples, where applicable or requested.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners.
Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
for compliance with requirements indicated.
Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,
from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 4
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
i.
j.
k.
l.
3.
1.05
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for
use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously
selected products were also options.
2.
A.
Form of Acceptance: Change Order after Contract for Construction, Addendum during
bidding phase without a Contract for Construction.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with Contract for Construction submittal
procedures. Show compliance with requirements.
1.
1.06
Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution
with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If
specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time,
include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability
or delays in delivery.
Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the
Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.
Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become
necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.
Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation
for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify
Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request,
or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
a.
L.
07/09/2010
Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with
products and construction methods of other contractors.
If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products,
Architect will determine which products shall be used.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and
loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of
construction spaces.
Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are
flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.
Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed
container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing,
unpacking, protecting, and installing.
Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that
products are undamaged and properly protected.
Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weather tight enclosure
above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 5
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
8.
9.
B.
1.07
07/09/2010
Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation,
and weather-protection requirements for storage.
Protect stored products from damage.
Storage: Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by
Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.
PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A.
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties
do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B.
Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready
for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly
executed.
Specified Form: Forms are included with the Specifications. Prepare a written document using
appropriate form properly executed.
Refer to Divisions 2 through 30 Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
Submittal Time: Comply with requirements for project closeout noted in the Contract for Construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
PRODUCT OPTIONS
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are
undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a
complete installation and indicated use and effect.
Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified,
provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar
situations on other projects.
Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.
Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is
Architect's.
Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish
"salient characteristics" of products.
Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or
approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to
obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following:
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 6
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
1.
Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Product" name a single product
and manufacturer, provide the product named.
a.
2.
Substitutions may be considered.
Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Products" introduce a list of
names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with
requirements.
a.
4.
Substitutions may be considered.
Manufacturer/Source: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturer" or
"Source" name single manufacturers or sources, provide a product by the manufacturer or from the
source named that complies with requirements.
a.
3.
07/09/2010
Substitutions may be considered.
Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturers"
introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that
complies with requirements.
a.
Substitutions may be considered.
5.
Available Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available Products"
introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed or
another product that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in "Substitution
Procedures" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
6.
Available Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available
Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the
manufacturers listed or another manufacturer that complies with requirements. Comply with
provisions in "Substitution Procedures" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
7.
Product Options: Where Specification paragraphs titled "Product Options" indicate that size,
profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system,
provide either the specific product or system indicated or a comparable product or system by
another manufacturer. Comply with provisions in "Substitution Procedures" Article.
8.
Basis-of-Design Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Basis-ofDesign Product[s]" are included and also introduce or refer to a list of manufacturers' names,
provide either the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named
manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other
characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in "Comparable
Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
a.
9.
Substitutions will not be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample,
select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and matches Architect's
sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 7
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
a.
10.
b.
2.02
A.
If no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily and complies with
other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents on
"Substitution Procedures" for selection of a matching product.
Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from
manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product (and manufacturer)
that complies with other specified requirements.
a.
11.
07/09/2010
Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors,
patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from
manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.
Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns,
textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from
manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.
Unit Prices: Refer to "Unit Prices" provisions in the Contract for Construction that control
product selection and for procedures required for processing of such selections.
COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to other
required submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed product:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated
results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names
and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
Samples, if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 016000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 8
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
SECTION 017123 - FIELD ENGINEERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 and other Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for field engineering services, including,
but not necessarily limited to, the following:
1.
Site lay-out work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
The Contractor shall identify existing control points and property line corner stakes.
B.
Verify layout information shown on the Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks
before proceeding to lay-out the Work. Locate and protect existing benchmarks and control points. Preserve
permanent reference points during construction.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Do not change or relocate benchmarks or control points without prior written approval. Promptly
report lost or destroyed reference points, or requirements to relocate reference points because of
necessary changes in grades or locations.
Promptly replace lost or destroyed project control points. Base replacements on the original survey
control points.
Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.
Existing utilities and equipment: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the
existence and location of underground utilities and other construction.
1.
Prior to construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connections of sanitary
sewer, storm sewer and water service piping.
3.2 PERFORMANCE
A.
Working from lines and levels established by the property survey, establish benchmarks and markers to set
lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to properly locate each element of the
Project. Calculate and measure required dimensions within indicated or recognized tolerances. Do not scale
Drawings to determine dimensions.
1.
2.
Advise entities engaged in construction activities of marked lines and levels provided for their use.
As construction proceeds, check every major element for line, level and plumb.
FIELD ENGINEERING
017123 - 1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
B.
Surveyor’s Log: maintain a surveyor’s log of control and other survey work. Make this log available for
reference.
1.
C.
07/09/2010
Record deviations from required lines and levels, and advise the Architect when deviations that exceed
indicated or recognized tolerances are detected. On Project Record Drawings, record deviations that
are accepted and not corrected.
Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, stakes for grading, fill and
topsoil placement, utility slopes and invert elevations by instrumentation and similar appropriate means.
1.
Contractor shall be responsible for providing an as-built survey for all sanitary and stormwater- related
site improvements. As-built survey shall be prepared and certified by a Florida registered land
surveyor and shall include, at a minimum, all invert elevations, slopes, pipe sizes, top of structure
elevations, and inlet elevations. Submit survey to Architect prior to Substantial Completion.
D.
Building Lines and levels: Locate and lay out batter boards for structures, building foundations,
column grids and locations, floor levels and control lines and levels required for mechanical and
electrical work.
E.
Existing Utilities: Furnish information necessary to adjust, move or relocate existing structures, utility poles,
lines, services or other appurtenances located in, or affected by construction. Coordinate with local authorities
having jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION 017123
FIELD ENGINEERING
017123 - 2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
SECTION 017300
EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 and other Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but
not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.03
Construction layout.
Field engineering and surveying.
General installation of products.
Coordination of Owner-installed products.
Progress cleaning.
Starting and adjusting.
Protection of installed construction.
Correction of the Work.
Contract for Construction regarding progress coordination procedures for coordinating field
engineering with other construction activities.
Contract for Construction "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.
Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and patching
necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work.
Contract for Construction regarding project closeout for submitting any required final property
survey(s), as-built drawings, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and
levels, and final cleaning.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For land surveyor and professional engineer to demonstrate their capabilities and
experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of
architects and owners, and other information specified.
B.
Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor and professional engineer certifying that location
and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.
C.
Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous
materials, for hazardous waste disposal. Comply with provisions listed in Section 017419 ‘Construction
Waste Management and Disposal’.
EXECUTION
017300 - 1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
D.
Certified Surveys: Submit copies of final property survey signed by land surveyor and professional
engineer in quantity as required by the Owner.
E.
Submit to SWFWMD a written statement of completion and certification by a registered professional
engineer utilizing the required Statement of Completion and Request for Transfer to Operation Entity
form identified in Chapter 40D-1.659, F.A.C., and signed, dated and sealed as-built drawings.
1.04
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in
jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the
kind indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
EXAMINATION
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction
indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and
location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work.
1.
B.
Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction
indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning site work, investigate and verify the existence
and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.
1.
2.
C.
Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.
Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary
sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical services.
Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving
Project site.
Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present
where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance. Record observations.
1.
Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work
is required by other Sections, include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
Description of the Work.
List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.
List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
Recommended corrections.
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes or primers.
Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
EXECUTION
017300 - 2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
4.
5.
3.02
07/09/2010
Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be
installed.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding
with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to adjust,
move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances
located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility
services according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission.
C.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other
construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication.
Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
D.
Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on
Drawings.
E.
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed
description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract
Documents.
3.03
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A.
Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in
relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect
and Construction Manager promptly.
B.
General: Engage a land surveyor and professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying
practices.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and
elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required
dimensions.
Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
Notify Architect and Construction Manager when deviations from required lines and levels exceed
allowable tolerances.
Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by
authorities having jurisdiction.
EXECUTION
017300 - 3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
C.
Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil
placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.
D.
Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work.
Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and
piers from two or more locations.
E.
Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels.
Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each
survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by
Architect and Construction Manager.
3.04
FIELD ENGINEERING
A.
Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.
B.
Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points
before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during
construction operations.
1.
2.
C.
Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of
Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the
need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect and Construction Manager
before proceeding.
Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements
on the original survey control points.
Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,
referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for
type and size of benchmark.
1.
2.
3.
Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.
Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary
reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its
original condition.
D.
Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring
field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and
elevations of construction and sitework.
E.
Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for
Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor that principal metes, bounds, lines,
and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey.
1.
2.
Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements
and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and
bearing from a site corner to a legal point.
Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with
authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."
EXECUTION
017300 - 4
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
3.05
A.
07/09/2010
INSTALLATION
General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease
of removal for replacement.
Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet (2.4 m) in spaces without a suspended ceiling.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C.
Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain
conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D.
Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in
excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E.
Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F.
Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in
place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.
1.
2.
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights
directed by Architect.
Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
G.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange
joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
H.
Hazardous Materials:
hazardous.
3.06
Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A.
Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's ‘Facilities’, vendors, and construction forces.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's
forces.
1.
2.
3.07
Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's
portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable.
Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction
progress.
Pre-installation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at pre-installation conferences
covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend pre-installation
conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the Work depend on Owner's
construction.
PROGRESS CLEANING
EXECUTION
017300 - 5
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
A.
07/09/2010
General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning
for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of
materials lawfully in compliance with provisions noted in Section 017419 ‘Construction Waste
Management’.
1.
2.
3.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.
Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is
expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).
Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark
containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
B.
Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C.
Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper
execution of the Work.
1.
2.
Remove liquid spills promptly.
Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work
area, as appropriate.
D.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of
manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended.
If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to
health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E.
Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F.
Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G.
Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely
remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.
1.
Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing
materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
H.
Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste
materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
I.
During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials
already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or
deterioration at Substantial Completion.
J.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the
remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability
without damaging effects.
K.
Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction,
completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure
during the construction period.
3.08
STARTING AND ADJUSTING
EXECUTION
017300 - 6
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
A.
Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units,
replace with new units, and retest.
B.
Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.
operation.
C.
Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace
damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect fieldassembled components and equipment installation, ensure compliance with minimum manufacturer
qualification requirements for personnel supporting this role.
3.09
Adjust equipment for proper
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
3.010
A.
CORRECTION OF THE WORK
Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply
with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
1.
Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with
matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B.
Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C.
Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without
visible evidence of repair.
D.
Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot
be repaired.
E.
Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
END OF SECTION 017300
EXECUTION
017300 - 7
This page left intentionally blank
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
SECTION 017329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 and other Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work.
B.
Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of
other Work.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their loadcarrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. X-ray structural elements for hidden reinforcing locations, prior
to cutting precast, pre-stressed structures.
B.
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch the following operating elements and related components in
a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or results in increased maintenance
or decreased operational life or safety.
1.
Primary operational systems and equipment.
2.
Air or smoke barriers.
3.
Fire-protection systems.
4.
Control systems.
5.
Communication systems.
C.
Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related components in a manner
that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as
intended, or results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
1.
Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.
D.
Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of
cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in
a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace
construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
1.
If possible, retain original Installer or fabricator to cut and patch exposed Work listed below. If it
is impossible to engage original Installer or fabricator, engage another recognized, experienced,
and specialized firm as applicable.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Masonry.
Roofing.
Soffits.
Stucco and ornamental plaster.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
017329-1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
B.
Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that
visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will
match the visual and functional performance of existing materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be
performed.
1.
Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including
compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
2.
Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B.
Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide
protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting
and patching operations.
C.
Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to
adjoining areas.
D.
Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass
such services before cutting to avoid interruption of services to occupied areas.
3.3
PERFORMANCE
A.
General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at
the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1.
Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other
construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
B.
Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining
construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original
Installer's written recommendations.
1.
In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and
chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum
disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2.
Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3.
Concrete, Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.
4.
Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed.
Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture
or other foreign matter after cutting.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
017329-2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
5.
C.
07/09/2010
Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these
Specifications.
1.
Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate
integrity of installation.
2.
Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into
retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and
refinishing.
3.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into
another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of
uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and
replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
a.
Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over
the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch.
Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
4.
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface
of uniform appearance.
5.
Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weather
tight condition.
END OF SECTION 017329
CUTTING AND PATCHING
017329-3
This page left intentionally blank
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 and Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Salvaging nonhazardous construction waste.
Recycling nonhazardous construction waste.
Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from
construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.
B.
Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or
deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for
reuse.
D.
Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.
E.
Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the
Work.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Develop waste management plan that results in end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 75
percent by weight of total waste generated by the Work.
B.
Salvage/Recycle Requirements: Owner's goal is to salvage and recycle as much nonhazardous
construction waste as possible including the following materials:
1.
Construction Waste:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Site-clearing waste.
Masonry and CMU.
Lumber.
Wood sheet materials.
Wood trim.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
Metals.
Roofing.
Insulation.
Carpet and pad.
Gypsum board.
Piping.
Electrical conduit.
Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated above, salvage or recycle 100
percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
1.5
07/09/2010
Paper.
Cardboard.
Boxes.
Plastic sheet and film.
Polystyrene packaging.
Wood crates.
Plastic pails.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Waste Management Plan: Submit copy of the plan within 30 days of date established for the Notice to
Proceed.
B.
Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit copy of the
report. Include separate reports for construction waste. Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Material category.
Generation point of waste.
Total quantity of waste in tons.
Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons.
Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons.
Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons.
Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste.
C.
Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit copy of the calculated
end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the
Work.
D.
Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and
organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
E.
Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and
organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
F.
Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by
recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts,
and invoices.
G.
Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and
incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
1.6
07/09/2010
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements:
jurisdiction.
B.
Waste Management Pre-Construction Conference: Review methods and procedures at the preconstruction meeting, related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.7
Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
Review and discuss waste management plan.
Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition.
Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and
bins needed to avoid delays.
Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal
facilities.
Review waste management requirements for each trade.
WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A.
General: Develop plan consisting of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue
analysis. Include separate sections in plan for construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight or
volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.
B.
Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of site-clearing, and construction waste
generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.
C.
Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or
disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of
waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this Project,
describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the Work.
Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and organizations,
include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and
organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials
each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name,
address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.
Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating
recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location on
Project site where materials separation will be located.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A.
General: Implement waste management plan as approved by Architect. Provide handling, containers,
storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during
the entire duration of the Contract.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
1.
B.
Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return.
Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan
procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum
interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1.
2.
3.2
Comply with Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities" for operation, termination, and removal
requirements.
Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as
appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site.
1.
2.
C.
07/09/2010
Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be
salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
Comply with Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities" for controlling dust and dirt,
environmental protection, and noise control.
RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL
A.
General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
B.
Recycling Receivers and Processors: List below is provided for information only; available recycling
receivers and processors include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
C.
3.3
WCA of Florida (formerly Meyer and Gabbert Inc.)
8001 Fruitville Rd.
Sarasota, Florida 34240
(941) 377-5370
Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling
waste materials shall accrue to Contractor.
RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE
A.
Packaging:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location.
Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site.
For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with
requirements for recycling wood.
Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for
recycling wood.
B.
Site-Clearing Wastes: Chip brush, branches, and trees on-site or at landfill facility.
C.
Wood Materials:
1.
2.
D.
Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.
Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.
Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 4
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
3.4
07/09/2010
DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A.
General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste
materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate
on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
B.
Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C.
Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
END OF SECTION 017419
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 5
This page left intentionally blank
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
SECTION 017700 – CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 and other Division 1 Specifications
sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2 PROJECT/WORK IDENTIFICATION
A.
This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project closeout, including but not
limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Inspection procedures.
Project record document submittal.
Operating and maintenance manual submittal.
Submittal of attic stock.
Submittal of warranties.
Final cleaning.
Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in Divisions
2 - through 26.
1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete
the following. List exceptions in the request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is
claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the work claimed as substantially complete.
Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of incomplete
construction, and reasons the Work is not complete.
Advise Owner of pending insurance and utility change-over requirements.
Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and
similar documents specifically required in each section of the specifications.
Submit record drawings and Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Project Closeout Manuals in
proposed form at Substantial Completion.
a.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Refer to Section 017823 – "Operation and Maintenance Data" for quantities of
O&M manuals to be submitted.
Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items.
Make final change-over of permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. Advise the Owner’s
personnel of change-over in security provisions.
Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of the Owner’s operating and maintenance
personnel at least 7 calendar days prior to substantial completion. Discontinue or change over and
remove temporary facilities from the site, along with construction tools, mock-ups, and similar
elements.
Prepare and submit contractor’s punch list at least 7 calendar days prior to substantial completion.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700- 1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
a.
10.
11.
B.
07/09/2010
Architect and Owner will subsequently prepare punch lists supplementing Contractor’s punch
list.
Submit all required permits, certifications and final approvals for site utility installations.
Complete final clean-up requirements, including touch-up painting. Touch-up and otherwise repair
and restore marred exposed finishes. Clear and remove all site debris for Owner’s safe and full
utilization of site except for items required to achieve final completion.
Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will either proceed with inspection
or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirement. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial
Completion on A.I.A. Form G704 following inspection, or advise the Contractor of construction that must be
completed or corrected and reinspected before the certificate will be issued.
1.
Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance.
1.4 FINAL INSPECTION
A.
When Contractor considers the Work has reached final completion, he shall submit:
1.
Written certification that:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Contract Documents have been reviewed.
Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.
Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents.
Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the Owner=s representative and are
operational.
Work is completed and ready for final inspection.
Revised Operation and Maintenance Manual(s) and project Closeout Manuals in final form five days
prior to Final Inspection.
a.
Refer to Section 017823 – "Operation and Maintenance Data" for quantities of O&M manuals
to be submitted.
B.
Architect will make an inspection to verify the status of completion with reasonable promptness after receipt
of such certification.
C.
Should Architect consider that the Work is incomplete or defective:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Architect will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing the incomplete or defective Work.
Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and send a second written
certification to Architect that the Work is complete.
Inspection will be repeated. Contractor shall bear cost of Architect’s re-inspection, including labor
and expenses as set forth in paragraph 1.3.B.1.
When the Architect finds that the work is acceptable under the Contract Documents, he shall request the
Contractor to make closeout submittals.
1.5 PROJECT CLOSEOUT MANUALS
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700- 2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
A.
Collect, identify and collate the following materials from the subcontractors to be bound in a hard cover, 3ring "D" style lay flat binder. Deliver two copies of the finished manuals to the Architect, for delivery to the
Owner for approval, as a condition precedent to final certification of payment.
B.
Indexing: Information shall be provided as follows. The individual entries are to be organized and indexed
per the specification Table of Contents.
C.
Listing of Contractor and Subcontractors: Provide a listing of subcontractors performing work, both on and
off site, with the Contractor heading the list. Required information shall include the following: (Example)
Division 1
Contractor
Company Name
Address
DBPR License Number
Representative’s Name and Title
Phone Number
Division 2
Termite Control
Company Name
Address
DBPR License Number
Representative’s Name and Title
Phone Number
D.
Certificate of Substantial Completion: Insert, at this point, a copy of the fully executed Certificate of
Substantial Completion, AIA document G704, as future reference for Owner.
E.
Testing, Inspections and Certificate of Occupancy: Provide copies of tests, and test and balance reports. See
Divisions 15 and 16. Provide copies of Certificates of Inspections from authorities having jurisdiction for
each trade, division or portion of work, as required. Provide a copy of the final executed Certificate of
Completion.
F.
Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims: Provide certification, on AIA Document G706 that
work covered by Contract Documents has been completed, and that payrolls, bills of materials and other
indebtedness connected with the Work for which the owner or his property might in any way be responsible,
have been paid or otherwise satisfied.
G.
Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens: Provide certification, on AIA Document G706A, that liens that are
or may be filed arising from work covered by Contract Documents have been released or waived, with any
exception noted. Provide additional certification from subcontractors, and material and equipment suppliers,
with any exceptions noted. Provide a bond satisfactory to cover exceptions.
H.
Lien Waivers: Provide releases and waivers of liens, from the Contractor and Subcontractors as supporting
documents to AIA Document G706A.
I.
Consent of Surety: Provide a Consent of Surety to Final Payment, on AIA Document G707.
J.
Warranties, Guarantees, and Bonds: Provide warranties, guarantees, and bonds called for in the Contract
Documents.
K.
Certificate of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations.
L.
Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title PROJECT CLOSEOUT MANUAL; and list title of
project.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700- 3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
1.6 CONTRACTOR’S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS TO ARCHITECT
A.
Project Closeout Manuals, as identified herein.
B.
Project Record Documents, as identified in Section 017839.
C.
Keys and Keying Schedule, as identified in Section 087100 Door Hardware.
1.7 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
A.
Submit the final Application for Payment in accordance with procedures and requirements stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A.
Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Prior to Substantial Completion, arrange for each installer of
equipment that requires regular maintenance to meet with the Owner’s personnel to provide instruction in
proper operation and maintenance. If installers are not experienced in procedures, provide instruction by
manufacturer’s representatives. Include a detailed review of the following items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
B.
Maintenance manuals.
Record documents.
Spare parts and materials.
Tools.
Lubricants.
Fuels.
Identification systems.
Control sequences.
Hazards.
Cleaning.
Warranties and bonds.
Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments.
As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Start-up.
Shutdown.
Emergency operations.
Noise and vibration adjustments.
Safety procedures.
Economy and efficiency adjustments.
Effective energy utilization.
3.2 FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: General cleaning during construction is required by the General Conditions.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700- 4
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
B.
07/09/2010
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit
to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with
manufacturers’ instructions.
1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for Certification of
Substantial Completion.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Remove labels that are not permanent labels.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove
glazing compound and other substances that are noticeable vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of
stains, films and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
reflective condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other
substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps.
Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter and other foreign
substances. Sweep paved areas clean; remove stains, spills and other foreign deposits. Rake
grounds that are neither paved nor planted, to a smooth even textured surface.
C.
Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work during
construction.
D.
Compliance; comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards of cleaning. Do
not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner’s property. Do not discharge
volatile, harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and
dispose of a in a lawful manner.
E.
Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work have become the Owner’s
property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed.
END OF SECTION 017700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700- 5
This page left intentionally blank
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 and other Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
Emergency manuals.
Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, finishes, systems, and
equipment.
Contract for Construction regarding "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals
for operation and maintenance manuals.
Contract for Construction regarding project closeout for submitting operation and maintenance
manuals.
Contract for Construction regarding project record documents for preparing as-built drawings for
operation and maintenance manuals.
Divisions 2 through 26 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for
the Work in those Sections.
DEFINITIONS
A.
System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.
B.
Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
1.4
SUBMITTALS: For each phase of the Work:
A.
Initial Submittal: Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Comply with the following
schedule:
1.
Initial submittal review copies of all O&M manuals shall be submitted in electronic form (*.pdf)
no later than 60 days prior to Substantial Completion.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017823 - 1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
B.
1.5
07/09/2010
Final Submittal: Submit in electronic form (*.pdf) copy of all O&M manuals in final form at least 30
days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days before final
inspection.
1.
Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect and Engineer review comments. Submit
three copies of each corrected manual in electronic form (*.pdf) within 15 days of receipt of
Architect's comments.
2.
Retain electronic (*.pdf) records of approved O&M manuals for Project Closeout.
COORDINATION
A.
Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one
factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by
representatives and prepare manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY
A.
Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
List of documents.
List of systems.
List of equipment.
Table of contents.
B.
List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and
maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.
C.
List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of
equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
D.
Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.
E.
Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify
each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents.
2.2
MANUALS, GENERAL
A.
Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system
and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual
shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Title page.
Table of contents.
Manual contents.
Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017823 - 2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Subject matter included in manual.
Name and address of Project.
Name and address of Owner.
Date of submittal.
Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.
Name and address of Architect.
Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the
content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.
1.
D.
If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data,
include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.
Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system,
subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and
components of one system into a single binder.
1.
Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to
hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in
each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other
binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of
equipment or system.
Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents.
Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to
indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in
the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project
Manual.
Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software
CD’s for computerized electronic equipment.
Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.
Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a.
b.
2.3
07/09/2010
If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as
foldouts.
If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert
typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.
EMERGENCY MANUALS
A.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
1.
2.
3.
Type of emergency.
Emergency instructions.
Emergency procedures.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017823 - 3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
B.
07/09/2010
Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions
and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Fire.
Flood.
Water leak.
Power failure.
Water outage.
System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
Chemical release or spill.
C.
Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar
codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer,
supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
D.
Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
Instructions on stopping.
Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
OPERATION MANUALS
A.
Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual
Specification Sections and the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
Descriptions: Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
Operating standards.
Operating procedures.
Operating logs.
Wiring diagrams.
Control diagrams.
Piped system diagrams.
Precautions against improper use.
License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
Product name and model number.
Manufacturer's name.
Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
Equipment function.
Operating characteristics.
Limiting conditions.
Performance curves.
Engineering data and tests.
Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017823 - 4
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
07/09/2010
Startup procedures.
Equipment or system break-in procedures.
Routine and normal operating instructions.
Regulation and control procedures.
Instructions on stopping.
Normal shutdown instructions.
Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
D.
Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.
E.
Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.
2.5
PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source
information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties
and bonds, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to
match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer
or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in
Project Manual.
C.
Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Product name and model number.
Manufacturer's name.
Color, pattern, and texture.
Material and chemical composition.
Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Inspection procedures.
Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
Repair instructions.
E.
Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related
services.
F.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions
that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1.
Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017823 - 5
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
2.6
07/09/2010
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A.
Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source
information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and
service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty
and bond information, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified
by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address,
and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C.
Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the
following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance
procedures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins.
Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and
component removal, replacement, and assembly.
Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
Test and inspection instructions.
Troubleshooting guide.
Precautions against improper maintenance.
Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
Demonstration and training videotape, if available.
Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required
lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with
standard time allotment.
1.
2.
Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly,
semiannual, and annual frequencies.
Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.
F.
Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts
identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of
maintenance materials and related services.
G.
Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone
number of service agent.
H.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions
that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1.
Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017823 - 6
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
MANUAL PREPARATION
A.
Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an
organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
B.
Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by
emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.
C.
Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and
maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data
indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a
system.
1.
2.
E.
Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets
pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component
incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item
using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and
delete references to information not applicable.
1.
F.
Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the
information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.
Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of
component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams.
Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration
of completed installation.
1.
2.
G.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each
system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual
for use by Owner's operating personnel.
Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.
Comply with Contract for Construction regarding requirements of newly prepared as-built
drawings.
Comply with Contract for Construction regarding closeout procedures for schedule for submitting
operation and maintenance documentation.
END OF SECTION 017823
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017823 - 7
This page left intentionally blank
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
SECTION 017836
WARRANTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 and other Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for warranties required by the Contract
Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties.
1.
B.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
1.03
Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor's period for correction of the Work.
Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" specifies procedures for submitting warranties.
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" specifies contract closeout procedures.
Divisions 2 through 26 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and
installations specified to be warranted.
Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are
specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not
relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products. Manufacturer's
disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and
subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Standard product warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for
particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner.
B.
Special warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to
extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner.
1.04
WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction, remove and
replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or must be removed and replaced to
provide access for correction of warranted construction.
B.
Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by
replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall
be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.
C.
Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild
the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract Documents. The
Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the
WARRANTIES
017836-1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.
D.
Owner's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties and
shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available under the law. Expressed
warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time in which the Owner can enforce such
other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.
1.
E.
1.05
A.
Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selection to
products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.
Where the Contract Documents require a special warranty, or similar commitment on the Work or part of
the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work, until the Contractor presents
evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.
SUBMITTALS
Submit written warranties as a single submittal as part of Project Close Out to the Architect prior to the
date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion
designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the
Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect.
1.
When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by
separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed
warranties to the Architect within 15 days of completion of that designated portion of the Work.
B.
When the Contract Documents require the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or
manufacturer to execute a special warranty, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms
and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner, through the
Architect, for approval prior to final execution.
C.
Form of Submittal: Compile 3 copies of each required warranty properly executed by the Contractor, or
by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an
orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.
D.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial-quality, durable 3-ring, vinyl-covered loose-leaf
binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (115-by280-mm) paper.
1.
2.
3.
Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab
to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation,
including the name of the product, and the name, address, and telephone number of the Installer.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"
Project title or name, and name of the Contractor.
When warranted construction requires operation and maintenance manuals, provide additional
copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
LIST OF WARRANTIES
WARRANTIES
017836-2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
A.
3.02
07/09/2010
Schedule: Provide warranties on products and installations as specified in each Section herein.
WARRANTIES
A.
Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work
where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.
B.
Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated
portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by
separate agreement with Contractor.
C.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project
Manual.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as
necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (115-by-280-mm)
paper.
Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to
identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation,
including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"
Project name, and name of Contractor.
Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
END OF SECTION 017836
WARRANTIES
017836-3
This page left intentionally blank
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 0 and other Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A.
Definitions: Record documents are defined to include those documents or copies relating directly to
performance of the work, which Contractor is required to prepare or maintain for Owner’s records, recording
the work as actually performed. In particular, record documents show changes in the work in relation to that
which is shown and specified by original contract documents; and show additional information of value to
Owner’s records, but indicated by original contract documents. Record documents include marked up copies
of contract drawings, shop drawings, specifications, addenda and change orders, marked up product data
submittals, record samples, and field records for variable and concealed conditions.
1.3 RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Mark-up procedure: During progress of the work, maintain a white-print set (blueline or blackline) of contract
drawings and notations of actual installations which vary substantially from the work as originally shown.
Mark whatever drawing is most capable of showing actual physical condition, fully and accurately. Give
particular attention to information on work concealed, which would be difficult to identify or measure and
record at a later date. Note alternate numbers, change order numbers and similar identification. Label each
sheet Project Record in 2 inch high letters.
1.
2.
Update project record prints as variations arise. Review progress of updates with Architect at each
monthly application for payment review meeting to confirm that record prints are up-to-date.
Architect may decline to certify contractor’s application for payment if record drawings have not been
updated.
In preparation for certification of substantial completion on last major portion of the work, review
completed mark up of record drawings with Architect. Architect may decline to certify substantial
completion if record drawings have not been updated.
1.4 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A.
General:
1.
During progress of the work, maintain one copy of specifications, including addenda, change orders
and similar modifications issues in printed form during construction, and mark up variations (of
substance) in actual work in comparison with text of specifications and modifications as issued. Give
particular attention to substitutions, selection of options, and similar information on work where it is
concealed or cannot otherwise be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note related
record drawing information and product data, submit to Architect for Owner’s records. Label front
cover Project Record in 2 inch high letters.
1.5 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A.
General: During progress of the work, maintain one copy of each product data submittal, and mark up
significant variations in the actual work in comparison with submitted information. Include both variations in
product as delivered to site, and variations from manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
017839 - 1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
installation. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the work which cannot otherwise
be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note related change orders and mark up record
drawings and specifications accordingly. Upon completion of mark up, submit complete set to Architect for
Owner’s records. Label each data submittal Project Record in 2 inch high letters.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 017839
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
017839 - 2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
SECTION 024113 - SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
Division 31 Section “Grading”.
C.
Division 31 Section “Excavation and Fill”.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes the following:
1.
Demolition and removal of portions of buildings and structures.
2.
Removing below-grade construction.
3.
Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities.
4.
Demolition and removal of pavements, curbs and gutters, drainage structures, utilities, signage or
landscaping.
5.
Filling voids in subgrade created as a result of removals or demolition.
6.
Disposals of demolished materials.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to
be removed and salvaged or recycled.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner ready for
reuse.
C.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise
indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or recycled.
1.4
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to applicable State and local codes for demolition of structures, safety of adjacent structures,
dust control, and runoff control.
B.
Obtain required permits and licenses from appropriate authorities. Pay associated fees including disposal
charges.
C.
Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements.
D.
Do not close or obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or fire hydrants without appropriate permits.
E.
Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when hazardous or contaminated materials are discovered.
F.
Test soils around buried tanks for contamination.
SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
024113-1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
1.5
07/09/2010
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A.
Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents,
commemorative plaques and tablets, structures, antiques, and other items of interest or value to Owner
that may be encountered during building demolition remain Owner's property. Carefully remove and
salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to Owner.
1.
1.6
Coordinate with Owner's historical adviser, who will establish special procedures for removal and
salvage.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For professional engineer refrigerant recovery technician.
B.
Proposed Environmental-Protection Dust-Control and Noise-Control Measures: Comply with Division 1
“Construction Waste Management and Disposal” requirements that indicate the measures proposed for
use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify options if proposed
measures are later determined to be inadequate.
C.
Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1.
Detailed sequence of demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each
activity.
2.
Interruption of utility services.
3.
Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
D.
Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering
refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed
according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was
recovered.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification program.
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning
demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Portions of buildings and areas adjacent to elements to be demolished will be vacated and their use
discontinued or turned off before start of Work.
B.
Owner assumes no responsibility for buildings and structures to be demolished.
1.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far
as practical.
C.
Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.
1.
Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
024113-2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
2.
D.
1.9
07/09/2010
If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;
immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a
separate contract.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities and subsurface obstructions that will remain after
demolition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SOIL MATERIALS
A.
Satisfactory Soils: Comply with Civil Engineering requirements for earthwork.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of building
demolition required.
B.
Review Project Record Documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not
guarantee that existing conditions are the same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.
C.
Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged.
D.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements are encountered, investigate and
measure the nature and extent of the element. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Provide, erect, and maintain erosion control devices, temporary barriers, and security devices at locations
indicated on Construction Drawings.
B.
Refrigerant: Remove and store refrigerant according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Existing Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving buildings
and structures to be demolished.
1.
Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.
2.
Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
3.
If utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with
building demolition provide temporary utilities that bypass buildings and structures to be
demolished and that maintain continuity of service to other buildings and structures.
4.
Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 24 inches below grade. Cap, valve, or plug and seal
remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
D.
Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to
preserve stability and prevent unexpected movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
1.
Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of demolition.
E.
Removed and Salvaged Items: Comply with the following:
SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
024113-3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.3
07/09/2010
Clean salvaged items of dirt and demolition debris.
Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
Transport items to Owner's storage area off-site.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
PROTECTION
A.
Existing Facilities: Protect adjacent landscaping materials, walkways, loading docks, building entries,
and other building facilities during demolition operations.
B.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during
demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location
during demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after demolition operations are
complete.
C.
Cease operations immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. Notify authority having
jurisdiction. Do not resume operations until directed by authority.
3.4
DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A.
General: Demolish indicated existing buildings and structures completely. Use methods required to
complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
1.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Maintain fire watch
and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
2.
Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
3.
Locate building demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose
excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
B.
Engineering Surveys: Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards that may result from
building demolition activities.
C.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct building demolition and debris-removal operations to
ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used
facilities.
1.
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes
around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
Use water mist and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Provide hoses and
water connections for this purpose. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations.
Do not use water when it may damage adjacent construction or create hazardous or objectionable
conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution.
3.5
MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
A.
Proceed with demolition of structural framing members systematically, from higher to lower level.
Complete building demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members
on the next lower level.
B.
Remove debris from elevated portions by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade
level in a controlled descent.
1.
Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to minimize ground
impact or dust generation.
SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
024113-4
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
C.
Concrete: Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction indicated to remain, using power-driven
saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.
D.
Masonry: Cut masonry at junctures with construction indicated to remain, using power-driven saw, then
remove masonry between saw cuts.
E.
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished at junctures with construction
indicated to remain, then break up and remove.
F.
Below-Grade Construction: Abandon foundation walls and other below-grade construction. Cut belowgrade construction flush with grade.
G.
Existing Utilities: Cap existing unused utilities and below-grade utility structures that are within 5 feet
outside of footprint indicated for new construction or area of Work. Ensure remaining utilities outside
this area remain in working order.
1.
Fill abandoned utility structures with satisfactory soil materials according to backfill requirements
indicated by Civil Engineer.
3.6
EXPLOSIVE DEMOLITION
A.
3.7
Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted.
SITE RESTORATION
A.
Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface, free from
irregular surface changes. Grade surface to provide flow of surface drainage after fill placement and
compaction. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
B.
Filling Voids: Completely fill below grade areas and voids resulting from demolition or removal of
structures, underground fuel storage tanks, wells, cisterns, etc., using approved select fill materials
consisting of stone, gravel, and sand free from debris, trash, frozen materials, roots, and other organic
matter.
3.8
REPAIRS
A.
General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by building demolition operations at no
cost to the Owner.
B.
Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials.
C.
Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining construction in a manner
that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.
3.9
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
General: Refer to Division 1 Section “Construction Waste Management and Disposal”.
B.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C.
Disposal: Refer to Division 1 Section “Construction Waste Management and Disposal”.
3.10
CLEANING
SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
024113-5
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
A.
07/09/2010
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by building demolition
operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before building demolition operations began.
END OF SECTION 024113
SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
024113-6
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
SECTION 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART ONE - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division-0; Division-1; Division-2; Division-4;
Division-5, Division-7; Division-9; Division-13.
1.02
DESCRIPTION
The extent of cast-in-place concrete work is shown on the drawings.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards;
except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings".
ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete".
ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork".
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice".
Workmanship: The Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not conform to
the specified requirements, including strength, tolerances, and finishes. Correct deficient concrete as
directed by the Architect.
Concrete Testing Service: Contractor shall employ a testing laboratory for material evaluation tests and to
perform sampling and testing of concrete during placement.
Tests, not specifically indicated to be done at the Owner's expense, including the retesting of rejected
materials and installed work, shall be done at the Contractor's expense.
Comply with the provisions of Section 01400.
Quality Control Testing During Construction:
Testing laboratory shall sample and test concrete for quality control during the placement of concrete as
follows:
Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C-172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C-94.
Slump: ASTM C-143; one test for each concrete load at point of discharge; and one test for each
set of compressive strength test specimens.
Air Content: ASTM C-173 volumetric method for normal and lightweight concrete; one for each
set of compressive strength test specimens.
Compressive Test Specimen: ASTM C-31; one set of 5 standard cylinders for each compressive
strength test, unless otherwise directed.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000-1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C-39; one set for each 50 cu. yds. or fraction thereof, of each
concrete class placed in any one day or for each 5,000 sq. ft. of surface area placed; 1 specimen
tested at 3 days, 1 at 7 days, 2 specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve
for later testing if required. One additional cylinder will be cast and tested at 56 days for 6000 and
7000 psi concrete, as applicable.
When the total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 20 cu. yds., the strength
test may be waived by the Architect if, in his judgment, adequate evidence of satisfactory
strength is provided.
Test results will be reported in writing to the Architect and the Contractor on the same day that
tests are made.
Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results
indicate the specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as
directed by the Architect. The testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by
cored cylinders complying with ASTM C-42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for
such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is
verified.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
General: Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with the provisions of Section 01300.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrications, bending and placement of concrete reinforcement.
Comply with the ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures"
showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams for bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement.
Include special reinforcement required and openings through concrete structures. Shop drawings must be
reviewed and marked approved by the Contractor prior to submittal to the Architect.
Mix Design: Submit to Architect five (5) copies of mix design for concrete at least 15 days prior to
delivery of concrete to project site. Contractor must review and approve mix design prior to submitting to
the Architect.
Material Certificates: Provide materials certificates signed by the Manufacturer and the Contractor,
certifying that each material item complies with, or exceeds, the specified requirements.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Deliver products to site and store in accordance with Section 01600.
PART TWO - PRODUCTS
2.01
FORM MATERIALS
Forms: Unless otherwise shown or specified, construct formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with
plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced or other acceptable panel type materials, to provide
continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces.
Fiber forms for Round Columns: Fiber round column forms shall be Alton sleek/tubes standard walls,
Sonoco Products Sonotube regular 'A' coated or equal, of size required on drawings.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000-2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form coating compounds that will not bond with, stain nor
adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces to be
cured with water of curing compound.
2.02
REINFORCING MATERIALS
Reinforcing Bar: ASTM A-615, Grade 60 deformed.
Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Bar: ASTM A-775
Steel Wire: ASTM A-82, plain, cold-drawn steel.
Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A-185, flat mat welded steel wire fabric.
Supports for Reinforcement: Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations, unless
otherwise indicated. Wood, brick and other devices will not be acceptable.
2.03
CONCRETE MATERIALS
Portland Cement: ASTM C-150, Type 1 unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
Fly Ash (ASTMC618 – Type F) may be substituted for cement. Maximum percentage by weight is 20%.
Mix designs submitted shall include cylinder breaks with the exact amount of fly ash proposed in all
concrete including the floor plank topping.
Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C-33, and as herein specified. Provide aggregates from a single source
for all exposed concrete.
Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious substances.
Maximum Aggregate Size: Not larger than 3/4” or three-fourths of the minimum clear spacing between
individual reinforcing bars or bundles of bars, except when approved otherwise by Architect. Maximum
aggregate for steel-pan stair fill and thin slabs 3" thick and less, shall be 1/2".
Water: Clean, fresh, potable.
Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C-260.
Calcium Chloride: Calcium chloride for admixtures containing more than 0.1% chloride ions shall not be
permitted.
Preformed Expansion Joint Material: W.R. Meadows "Ceramar" flexible foam, closed cell or approved
equal.
Membrane Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C-309, Type 1d with fugitive dye, unless other type
acceptable to the Architect.
Membrane Curing Compound: (For Vertical Surfaces)
Moisture Barrier: Provide 10 mil ‘Stego’ or equal vapor barrier system.
2.04
PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES
Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete in accordance with applicable provisions of
ASTM C-94.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000-3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials to be
employed on the project for each class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211.1.
Submit written reports to the Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days
prior to start of work. Each mix design shall be identified by a number or code unique to that mix.
Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the 28 day psi compressive strength as indicated on
drawings and schedules.
Admixtures: Use air entraining admixture in all exterior exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add
air entraining admixture at the Manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of placement
having air content from 3% to 5% unless otherwise approved by Engineer.
Use admixtures for water reducing and set control (with written permission of Architect).
Slump Limits: Slump range shall be 4"-6" for all structural concrete.
2.05
CONCRETE MIXING
Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ASTM C-94 and as herein specified.
2.06
CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
Provide as required.
2.07
FOAM IN PLACE INSULATION
For walls indicated to receive core-filled insulation systems, provide by ‘Tailored Foam of Florida’ or prior
approved equal by Architect.
PART THREE - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
Construct forms complying with ACI 347 to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain
accurate alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures.
Chamfer exposed corners and edges 3/4" as shown, using wood, metal PVC, or rubber chamfer strips
fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.
Form Ties: Factory fabricated, adjustable length, removable or snap off metal form ties, designed to
prevent form deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal.
Fiber Forms for Round Columns: Install forms in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.02
PLACING REINFORCEMENT
Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or
concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers,
and hangers, as required. Comply with ACI 301 and 318.
3.03
JOINTS
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000-4
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints, which are not shown on the drawings, so as not
to impair the strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the Architect.
Place construction joints as indicated on the structural drawings.
Isolation Joints in Slabs-On-Grade: Construct isolation joints at all points of contact between slabs on
ground and vertical surfaces and as shown on the structural drawings.
Control Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Construct control joints in slabs-on-ground to form panels of patterns
as shown. See typical detail on structural drawings.
Saw cuts shall be made as soon as possible after final troweling without dislodging aggregate, normally 12
hours.
Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints as shown. Install pre-molded filler where specified. See
Section 07920 for sealants.
3.04
INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
General: Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work
that is attached to, or supported by, cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions,
and directions provided by suppliers of the items to be attached thereto.
3.05
PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES
Coat the contact surfaces of forms with a non-staining form coating compound before reinforcement is
placed.
3.06
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
General: Comply with ACI 304, and as herein specified. Subgrades shall be inspected and approved before
concrete is placed for concrete poured on grade. Forms and reinforcing shall be inspected and approved
prior to concrete placement.
Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by handspading, rodding or
tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with the recommended
practices of ACI 309, to suite the type of concrete and project conditions. The use of vibrators or other
mechanical devices to move the concrete in the forms is not permitted. Concrete shall be deposited as near
its final location as practical.
Hot Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair the quality and
strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305.
3.07
FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES
Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finish work or by other
construction, unless otherwise indicated. This is the concrete surface having the texture imparted by the
form facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other
projections exceeding 1/4" in height chipped off, defective areas, honeycomb and tie holes filled and
repaired with cement grout.
Smooth Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed to view, or that are to be covered with a
coating material applied directly to the concrete, or a covering material bonded to the concrete, such as
waterproofing, dampproofing, painting, or other similar system, to have the as-cast concrete surface
obtained with selected form facing material, arranged orderly and symmetrically with a minimum of seams.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000-5
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
Repair and patch all defective areas including all fins, joints, concrete or mortar splatter. Projections shall
be completely removed and smoothed, and all tie rod holes, stone pockets, wood grain marks, and holes
shall be grouted flush and smoothed. All honeycomb cut out and patched with grout and smoothed.
Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces occurring
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces.
Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless
otherwise shown.
Exposed Aggregate Concrete Finish: For surfaces designated on the drawings as Detectable Warning or
other areas as required by the Architect. Aggregate shall be river gravel, smooth, 1/4" minimum to 3/8"
maximum size, washed, color as selected by Architect. Cement, water, admixtures, etc., per this Section
(3010). Wash concrete surfaces with water and scrub with stiff bristle brush and/or wet concrete surfaces
with water and scrub with acid etch solution exposing aggregate. Do not expose more than 40% of
aggregate surface. Prior to performing work prepare one (1) horizontal sample panel 3'-0" x 4'-0" with full
aggregate color range for review by Architect.
3.08
MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES
General: Comply with ACI 301 for the specified finish specification and methods. The use of jitterbugs for
finishing slabs will not be permitted.
3.09
TYPE OF FINISHES AND TOLERANCES
Floated Finish: For surfaces intended to receive roofing, waterproofing membranes, or sand bed pavers.
Class by tolerance (5/16" in 10'-0").
Troweled Finish: For floors intended as walking surfaces or for reception of floor coverings. Class by
tolerance 5/16" in 10'-0", 3/8" in 20'-)’, and +/- 3/4" total building.
Broom or Belt Finish: For sidewalks, steps, platforms, ramps, or other areas designated on the drawings.
Class by tolerance (5/16" in 10'-0").
3.10
CONCRETE CURING, SEALING AND PROTECTION
Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing.
Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.
Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue
final curing for at least 7 days in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. Avoid rapid drying at end of final
curing period.
Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moisture retaining cover curing, by membrane curing, and
by combination thereof, as herein specified.
Provide Moisture Cover Curing as Follows:
Cover concrete surfaces with moisture retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest
practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive.
Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof
tape.
Provide Membrane Curing to Slabs as Follows:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000-6
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
Apply membrane forming curing compound to concrete surfaces as soon as final finishing
operations are complete (within 2 hours). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power
spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas which are subjected to
heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing
period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as
applicable.
Sealing Concrete Floors: Clean surfaces of all foreign material, oil and grease. Apply an additional coat of
cure and seal material, same as used concrete surfaces to all floors not receiving other finish. Apply at rate
recommended by manufacturer. Do not apply second coat to floors receiving resilient flooring.
3.11
REMOVAL OF FORMS
Comply with ACI 301 and 318 and structural notes for removal of forms.
3.12
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by mechanical,
electrical, plumbing, or civil specialties, or other trades unless otherwise shown or directed after work of
other specialties or trades is in place.
Reinforced Masonry: Provide 3,000 psi concrete for reinforced masonry lintels and bond beams where
indicated on drawings and as scheduled. Maintain accurate location of reinforcing steel during concrete
placement.
3.13
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal
of forms.
END OF SECTION
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000-7
This page left intentionally blank
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
SECTION 042200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART ONE - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Requirements of the construction documents including detail plates, General Requirements of this Project
Manual and modifications by Addenda or Change Order, apply to work under this section.
Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, etc. and services necessary and incidental to the complete
fabrication, furnishing and erection of this section as shown, noted, detailed and reasonably implied on the
drawings and in the specifications.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
Submit the following product data to engineer for review prior to start of work.
Data for concrete masonry unit technical requirements.
Data for masonry reinforcement.
Data for metal ties.
Data for mortar mix.
Data for foam in pace insulation systems.
1.03
STORAGE AND PROTECTION
Masonry units shall be stored at the job site on raised platforms a minimum of four (4) inches above ground.
Cover with a non-staining waterproof material.
Protect face of units against staining and keep top of walls covered with non-staining waterproof covering
when work is not in progress. This covering shall extend down over at least two (2) courses of units then in
the wall. When work is all loose mortar and, in drying weather, thoroughly wet.
PART TWO - MATERIALS
2.01
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
Concrete masonry units shall be a modular dimension and shall include all special shapes and sizes to
complete the work as shown. Units shall be sound and free from cracks, chipped edges or other defects that
would interfere with the proper setting or impair the strength or durability of the construction.
Where used as the finished surface of exposed masonry walls, shall be free from surface defects that would
be noticeable and objectionable at a distance of three (3) feet from the finished wall.
Texture of masonry units shall be medium and/or sand finish. Units shall be as approved samples.
Hollow Regular Concrete Masonry Units eight (8) inches and over in width shall conform to "Standard
Specifications for Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units" Grade N-1 conforming to ASTM- C90,
with a 28-Day strength of not less than 1900 p.s.i. (net section area).
Solid Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units shall conform to Grade N-1, ASTM C-145.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
Concrete Block six (6) inches and less in width shall be Type-1 Hollow Non Load-Bearing Concrete
Masonry Units, conforming to ASTM C-129.
Comply with ASTM C-140 Methods of sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units.
Blending of sand or screening in with the aggregate is strictly prohibited.
All units shall be free of organic impurities that will cause rusting, staining or pop-outs and shall contain no
combustible matter.
2.02
MASONRY REINFORCEMENT
Horizontal Reinforcement: shall be equal to "DURO-WALL" or "BLOK-LOK", continuous welded steel
reinforcement.
For Exterior Walls: Standard, Ladder type (No. 9 ga. side rods and cross rods) mill galvanized coating of
0.80 ounce zinc as per ASTM A641-Class 3.
For Interior Walls: Standard ladder (No. 9 ga. side rods and cross rods), mill galvanized coating of 0.40
ounce zinc as per ASTM A641-Class 1.
Vertical Masonry reinforcement: Round bar, conforming to ASTM 615, Grade 60, shall be used for
vertical masonry reinforcement where shown.
2.03
METAL TIES
Prefabricated corners and tees of size, type and material as horizontal reinforcement for exterior and interior
walls.
2.04
MORTAR MIX MATERIALS
Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, Domestic.
Masonry Cement
ASTM C91, Domestic.
Sand: ASTM C144.
Water: Shall be clean, free from oils, acids, alkali, chlorides, or any other organic matter.
2.05
MORTAR MIX
Mixes shall meet ASTM C 270, Proportion Specifications and shall be of the following types:
Type S (1800 psi) for exterior above grade loadbearing and non-loadbearing parapet walls and
interior loadbearing walls and non-loadbearing partitions.
Mix accurately in following proportions by volume:
Type S: One (1) part masonry cement, one-half (1/2) part Portland Cement and four (4) parts
sand.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
2.06
03/01/2010
AGGREGATES
All aggregates shall conform to ASTM C-33.
2.07
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
Concrete masonry units upon delivery to the job site shall comply with limitations for moisture content and
shall be maintained in this condition by Contractor prior to laying in structure by storing them above ground
and by covering them for protection against wetting.
Mortar for masonry walls shall have enough water added to produce, after thorough mixing, a mortar of
good working consistency.
Cells containing vertical reinforcing bars shall be grouted with cement grout conforming with ASTM C476, having a 28-day compressive strength of not less than 2000 p.s.i., a slump of between seven (7) inches
and eleven (11) inches.
2.08
FOAM IN PLACE INSULATION
For walls indicated, provide foam in place insulation systems by ‘Tailored Foam of Florida’ or prior
approved equal by Architect.
PART THREE -EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
Mix mortar by methods that will insure accurate proportioning of all ingredients; mix materials by powerdriven mixer until the entire batch is homogenous and of proper consistency.
Lay all units plumb, true to line and level to courses laid in a running bond. Work shall be performed by
skilled masons, in keeping with the best trade practice. Any unit disturbed after mortar has stiffened shall be
removed and re-laid with fresh mortar. All workmanship shall be of highest grade.
Bond each course at corners and intersections and break vertical joints at least four (4) inches. No face
units less than four (4) inches will be permitted. Lay units with running bond.
Concrete masonry units shall be set with fully-mortared joints, both vertically and horizontally. Mortar
joints shall be struck flush unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
Units with open cells exposed in walls will not be permitted.
All cuts shall be uniform 3/8 inch wide.
All cuts shall be made with masonry saw.
Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns, with uniform joint widths and to
properly locate openings, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less than half size units at corners, jambs
and wherever possible at other locations.
On completion, point up all exposed masonry, fill all holes and joints; remove loose mortar, cut out
defective joints; and re-point where necessary. Masonry surface to be exposed either painted or unpainted,
shall be thoroughly cleaned. Leave surface free from mortar and other stains at completion of work.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
Joint of dissimilar materials, i.e. concrete beams/columns; concrete block; metals, etc. shall receive backer
rods and sealant - NOT MORTAR.
All exposed painted concrete blocks shall have sand finish.
3.02
HORIZONTAL MASONRY REINFORCEMENT
All walls made of hollow masonry units shall be laid with masonry reinforcement, horizontally, every
second block course; lap all joints a minimum of six (6) inches.
Additionally, such reinforcement shall be placed in every bed joint below and above openings, extending
not less than twenty-four (24) inches beyond such openings. Masonry reinforcement shall be lapped not
less than eight (8) inches at corners and intersections, and similar laps will be permissible not closer than
twelve (12) feet in straight lengths of wall.
3.03
VERTICAL MASONRY REINFORCEMENT
Install round bar, where indicated on the drawings or as specified herein, and fill concrete block cells with
concrete in four (4) foot maximum lifts.
Vertical reinforcing bars terminating at roof level shall be embedded not less than twelve (12) inches into
roof beams and/or slabs.
Care shall be taken to prevent mortar droppings from accumulating in cells to be grouted and previously
placed floor slabs. Masonry cells to be grouted shall be aligned so as to be continuous and unobstructed
vertically. Masonry walls shall be left to cure after laying for not less than twenty-four (24) hours, before
grouting.
Inspection openings shall be provided at the bottom of each story height in randomly-selected cells to be
grouted. Such openings shall be sealed after inspection has verified that the cells have been cleaned out,
immediately before grouting.
3.04
METAL TIES
Install prefabricated corners at all corners in every 2nd block course, overlapping a maximum of six (6)
inches with horizontal reinforcement.
Install prefabricated tees at all masonry wall intersections in every 2nd block course, overlapping a
minimum of six (6) inches with horizontal reinforcement.
3.05
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
All damaged material and faulty workmanship shall be removed and be replaced with new material in the
best workmanlike manner at no cost to the Owner and to the full satisfaction of the Architect.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200 - 4
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Stainless steel rods, plates and bolts for suspended walkway hanger brackets.
Aluminum framing for decorative tube screen construction.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit each item in this article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 01 Specification Sections.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
1.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
C.
Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel certifying that products furnished
comply with requirements.
D.
Samples representative of materials and finished products as may be requested by the Architect.
1.4
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.5
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of other construction contiguous with metal
fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete.
Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,
concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in
concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METALS, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
FERROUS METALS
A.
Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240 or ASTM A 666, Type 316L.
B.
Stainless-Steel Rods, Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 316L.
C.
Rolled-Steel Floor Plate:
ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
2.3
NONFERROUS METALS
A.
Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6, 6063-T52.
B.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T52.
C.
Aluminum Tubing: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T52 with sharp corners and excellent finishing,
unless otherwise noted on drawings.
1.
Size: as indicated on drawings.
2.
Wall thickness: 0.125”
3.
Length: varies.
4.
Include welded aluminum end caps at exposed ends.
2.4
FASTENERS
A.
General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior
use.
1.
2.
2.5
Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.
Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.
B.
Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts:
Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts,
ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594 and, where indicated, flat washers.
C.
Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
1.
Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: stainless-steel
bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Bituminous Paint: Cold applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
2.6
03/01/2010
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units
only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated
installation.
B.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
C.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
D.
Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or
welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head
(countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
F.
Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
G.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,
and similar items.
H.
Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring
devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
2.7
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Finish metal fabrications prior to field assembly.
C.
Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into
surrounding surface.
2.8
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes. Powder Coated finish as selected by Architect.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with
edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
B.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for
use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and
other connectors.
D.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
E.
Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with
grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:
1.
2.
3.
Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint.
Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.
Neoprene Washers: Same size as fastener, where indicated on Construction Drawings.
END OF SECTION 055000
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 4
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
SECTION 075600 – FLUID APPLIED ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
1.3
Fluid applied flexible acrylic waterproofing system over concrete.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.4
Provide waterproofing membrane that prevents the passage of water.
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM D2370 – Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
B.
ASTM D1204 – Test Method for Linear Dimensional changes of Non-rigid Thermoplastic Sheeting or
Film at Elevated Temperature.
C.
ASTM G26 – Practice for Operating Light Exposure Apparatus (Xenon Arc Type) With or Without
Water for Exposure on Non Metallic Surfaces.
D.
ASTM E96 – Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
E.
FM 4470 – Wind Uplift Resistance
F.
ASTM E 108 – Test Methods for Fire Test of Roof Coverings.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate special joint or termination conditions and conditions of interface with other
materials. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashing, penetrations, and inside and
outside corners, and tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing.
Product Data:
Provide data for rigid material description, physical properties, recommended storage conditions,
shelf life, precautions, flexible flashings, joint cover sheet, and joint crack sealants, with
temperature range for application of waterproofing membrane.
1.
C.
Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring
special attention. Include instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate.
FLUID-APPLIED ROOFING
075600 - 1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
D.
Test Data: Provide documentation supporting tests referred to under Item 1.4.
E.
Sample Warranty: Copy of special waterproofing manufacturer's [and Installer's] warranty stating
obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions before starting waterproofing.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer specializing in performing the work of this section, who is
authorized, approved, or licensed by waterproofing manufacturer to install manufacturer's products.
B.
Manufacturer shall have been in business and shall have had experience in manufacturing these products
for a minimum of 15 years.
C.
Roofing System: Must meet 8109 psf uplift adhesion resistance as per ASTM E74 Grade B on concrete.
D.
Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials, protection course through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.8
Products: V.O.C. Requirements shall be less than 90 gram/liter.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver liquid materials to project site in original undamaged containers with seals unbroken, bearing the
following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Name of manufacturer
Product name and type of contents and products code
Net volume of contents
Date of manufacture and lot or batch number
Storage temperature limits
Shelf life expiration date
Mixing instructions and proportions of contents
Safety information and instructions
B.
Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location in
accordance with the waterproofing manufacturer’s instructions.
C.
Store materials at temperatures between 40 deg F and 90 deg F. Keep out of direct sunlight.
D.
Support stored material containers on pallets and cover with tarpaulin tied to bottom of pallets.
E.
Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.
1.9
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not apply if ambient temperatures are expected to fall below 45 deg F or
if rain is expected before the application has time to cure. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet
FLUID-APPLIED ROOFING
075600 - 2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
substrate, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F above
dew point.
B.
1.10
A.
Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials.
WARRANTY
Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by waterproofing manufacturer and Installer
agreeing to repair or replace waterproofing that does not comply with requirements or that does not
remain watertight within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Ten years after date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products:
1.
Fluid Applied Flexible Acrylic Waterproofing System:
a.
b.
c.
2.2
Sealoflex, Inc. (Basis of design)
Hydro-Stop - PremiumCoat
Soprema - Alsan
WATERPROOFING MATERIALS
A.
General: Sealoflex CT three-stage, fabric reinforced, flexible, acrylic coating; liquid applied in successive
stages to form one continuous, seamless watertight membrane; 45 mil minimum cured total system
thickness; comprised of the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.3
Saturation Coat: Sealoflex Pink (high flexible water based acylic emulsion coating).
Fabric: Sealoflex, polyester, non-woven, stitch bonded and heat set fabric.
Finish Coat: Sealoflex Finish Coat (ultraviolet light resistant blend of highly flexible waterbased
acrylic co-polymer resin coating). Color as selected from manufacturer’s standard colors.
Cured Membrane Characteristics:
1.
Tensile Strength, ASTM D2370: 3109 psi.
2.
Elongation, ASTM D2370: 61%.
3.
Dimensional Stability, ASTM D1204: < 0.44% change.
4.
Weathering, ASTM G26: No effect on physical properties after 3600 hours.
5.
Moisture Vapor, ASTM E96: 3.2 grain/hr./sq. ft.
6.
Wind Uplift, FM 4470: Meets 1-690.
7.
Fire Rating, ASTM E108: Class A.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
Surface Primer: Sealobond Primer WB depending on surface conditions.
FLUID-APPLIED ROOFING
075600 - 3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
B.
Surface Primer: Dampseal 101 must be used if concrete substrate exceeds 8% moisture.
C.
Surface Primer: Sealoment Plus depending on conditions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify substrate surfaces are durable, free of frozen matter, dampness, loose particles, cracks, pits,
projections, or foreign matter detrimental to adhesion or application of waterproofing system.
B.
Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and not detrimental to full contact bond of waterproofing
material.
C.
It is recommended that all concrete be tested for moisture content prior to application of the Sealoflex
System. Structural concrete moisture should be < 8%. Cellular Lightweight concrete moisture should be
at < 19%. If the moisture content is greater than specified, it is recommended that Dampseal 101 be
applied.
D.
Verify that roof surface has positive drainage.
3.2
SURFACE PREPARATION
A.
Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing.
B.
Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing by removing all loose and flaking particles, grease,
and laitence.
C.
Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer.
D.
Seal cracks and joints with sealant materials using depth to width ratio as recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
3.3
WATERPROOFING APPLICATION
A.
Start installing waterproofing in presence of manufacturer’s technical representative.
B.
Apply primers depending upon surface conditions. Allow to cure.
C.
Apply base coat to the entire area. Embed fabric directly into the coating while still wet. Immediately
follow with saturation coat to cover fabric. Overlap adjacent runs of fabric 3” minimum. Allow to dry.
D.
Apply base and saturation coats at a total rate of 40 sq. ft./gal.
E.
Continue waterproofing material up vertical surfaces minimum 3”.
F.
Apply finish coat over waterproofing material at a coverage rate of 70 sq. ft./gal. over entire roof being
treated. Allow to dry completely.
G.
Apply waterproofing system to a minimum 45 mil total cured thickness.
FLUID-APPLIED ROOFING
075600 - 4
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
3.4
03/01/2010
CURING, PROTECTING, AND CLEANING
A.
Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, taking care to prevent
contamination and damage during application stages and curing. Protect finished waterproofing from
inclement weather until cured.
B.
Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
C.
Immediately clean unscheduled surfaces receiving waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
END OF SECTION 075600
FLUID-APPLIED ROOFING
075600 - 5
This page left intentionally blank
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
SECTION 076000 –FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The Bidding Requirements and Contractual Requirements of Division One shall apply to all work
hereunder.
1.02
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
1.03
Section 061063—Rough Carpentry
Retrofitting of penetrations in existing roofing assemblies.
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, product data and samples under provisions of the Contract for Construction.
B. Describe material thickness and profile, joining pattern, joining details, fastening methods and
installation details on shop drawings.
C. Provide a color selection chart for the coatings on sheet metal items.
1.04
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All materials shall be delivered and stored to prevent twisting, bending or abrasion.
B. Prevent contact with materials during shipping and storage which may cause discoloration, staining or
damage.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer shall specialize in sheet metal flashing work with five years minimum experience.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. New sheet metal flashing systems adjacent to existing shall match the finish of the adjacent systems,
otherwise being of 0.050-inch mill finish aluminum.
2.02
ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners shall be stainless steel screws with soft neoprene washers at exposed fasteners.
B. Fasteners for concrete masonry shall be zinc fastener with stainless steel expansion anchor ¼-inch by 1
½-inch such as Rawl, Zamac, Nailin, Hilti Metal Hit Anchor or an approved equal product.
C. Sealant at sheet metal joints shall be one part, non-sag polyurethane sealant such as Mameco’s Vulkem
116 sealant or an approved equal product.
2.01
FABRICATION
A. Formed sections are to be true to shape, accurate in size, square and free from distortion or defects.
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
076000-1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
B. Form pieces in longest practical lengths.
C. Hem exposed edges on underside ½-inch, miter and seam corners.
D. Fabricate each corner from one piece with minimum 18-inch long legs, weld mitered joint and seal with
approved sealant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A. Verify openings, pipes, sleeves, ducts, dampers are solidly set, edge strips and
reglets as required in place and nailing strips located.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Field measure all site conditions.
B. Install starter and edge strips and cleats before starting installation.
C. Seam and seal all joints.
D. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes and lines accurate to
profiles.
E. Seal metal joints watertight.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Conform to installation recommendations included in SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, 5th
Edition.
B. Repair and make watertight all metal covers, vent base corners and/or seams that are split, cut or
otherwise damaged during or prior to construction.
END OF SECTION
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
076000-2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations:
1.
Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces as indicated below:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below:
a.
b.
3.
d.
e.
Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls where indicated.
Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete walls and
partitions.
Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows.
Other joints as indicated.
Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below:
a.
b.
B.
Control, expansion, and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
Other joints as indicated.
Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non traffic surfaces as indicated below:
a.
b.
c.
4.
Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
Control and expansion joints in Portland cement plaster.
Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows.
Control and expansion joints in ceiling and overhead surfaces.
Other joints as indicated.
Control, construction, and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs where indicated.
Other joints as indicated.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
Division 7 Section “Flashing and Sheet Metal” for sealants used in sheetmetal work.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and to maintain
watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required.
B.
Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples, consisting of strips of
actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
C.
Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealants attesting that their products comply with specification
requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.
D.
Provide and maintain a file of manufacturer’s instructions for each of the products used.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed joint sealant applications similar
in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in construction with a record of
successful in-service performance.
B.
Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials from a single
manufacturer for each different product required.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating
manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing
instructions for multi-component materials.
B.
Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration
or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1.
2.
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealant
manufacturer.
When joint substrates are wet.
B.
Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than
allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated.
C.
Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of
interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Sequence installation of joint sealants in existing interior concrete pavement to occur prior to application of
clear concrete sealing compound where indicated or scheduled on drawings.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint filler, and other related materials that are compatible with one
another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B.
Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following:
1.
Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for products of
type indicated.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
C.
03/01/2010
Interior sealants shall comply with the limits of VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59
Subpart D and specification Section 018113, regarding “Low-Emitting Materials”. Verify compliance with
these requirements for all interior products shown in this section. All non-compliant products submitted will
be rejected.
2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing elastomeric sealants that
comply with ASTM C 920, including those requirements referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for Type,
Grade, Class, and Uses.
B.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
C.
Single Part Pourable Urethane Sealant for use in horizontal joints in floor slabs, sidewalks, and concrete
pavement. Provide one of the following:
1.
2.
2.
D.
Single Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant for use in sealing hollow metal door frames to adjoining wall surfaces,
roof flashing and edge metal installations, and general purpose exterior sealing except where silicone is
specified:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
“Vulkem 45"; Tremco Incorporated.
“NR-201 Urexpan”; Pecora Corp.
“Sonolastic SL1"; Sonneborn Building Products.
“Vulkem 921”; Tremco Incorporated.
“Dynatrol 1”; Pecora Corp.
“Sika Flex-1a”; Sika Corp.
“Sonolastic NP 1”; Sonneborn Building Products.
Medium-Modulus Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant for perimeter sealing of aluminum windows and
storefronts.
1.
791; Dow Corning (accommodates joint movement of ±50 percent).
a.
Apply to masonry and concrete with Dow Corning 1200 Primer.
2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: Manufacturer’s standard, one part, nonsag, mildew-resistant, acrylic-emulsion
sealant complying with ASTM C 834, formulated to be paintable and recommended for exposed applications
on interior locations involving joint movement of not more than plus or minus 5 percent. Provide at
intersections of interior door and window frames and adjoining wall surfaces.
1.
2.
“AC-20"; Pecora Corp.
“Sonolac”; Sonneborn Building Products.
2.4 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANT
A.
Acoustical sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer’s standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining
latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following:
1.
Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in
building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
2.
B.
03/01/2010
Install at perimeter joints around all electrical boxes in acoustically-rated walls and all drywall ceilings
throughout Music Building 1 and Building 1 Addition, and elsewhere as indicated on drawings.
Manufacturer – Provide one of the following:
1.
2.
AC-20FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corporation
Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant; USG Corp.
2.5 MILDEW – RESISTANT SILICONE SEALANT
A.
One-part mildew-resistant interior sealant designed to seal nonporous interior building surfaces at kitchen and
kitchen support areas including any tubs, sinks, lavatories, and urinals at perimeter intersection with finished
walls.
B.
Manufacturer – Provide one of the following:
1.
2.
Dow Corning 786 Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant.
Sanitary SCS1700 Sealant; G.E. Silicones
2.6 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A.
General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant
manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B.
Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of
flexible plastic foam of either material indicated below and of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth
and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:
1.
2.
C.
Closed-cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, nonoutgassing in unruptured
state.
Proprietary, reticulated, closed-cell polymeric foam, nonoutgassing, with a density of 2.5 pcf (40
kg/cu. m) and tensile strength of 35 psi (240 kPa) per ASTM D 1623, and with water absorption less
than 0.02 g/cc per ASTM C 1083.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for
preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint
where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint
substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant
backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming in any way joint
substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with
joint substrates.
C.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to
joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 4
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance. Do not
proceed with installation of joint sealants until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with
recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant,
including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant
adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing,
water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and similar porous joint substrate surfaces
by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to
produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove
loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oilfree compressed air.
Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other nonporous surfaces
with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of
interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer
based on preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint
sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage
or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that
otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to
remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A.
General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
B.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as
applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C.
Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements:
1.
Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position
required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths
that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
a.
b.
c.
2.
Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers.
Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application and replace
with dry material.
Install bond breaker tape between sealants where backer rods are not used between sealants and joint
fillers or back of joints.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 5
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
D.
Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and
fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing
uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement
capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed.
E.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins,
tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant
manufacturer.
1.
Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 CLEANING
A.
Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning
materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A.
Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from
damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or
damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out
and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that and installations with repaired areas
are indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION 079200
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 6
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
SECTION 081100 - METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Standard hollow-metal steel doors.
Standard hollow-metal steel frames.
Division 4 Section “Concrete Unit Masonry” for building anchors into and grouting frames in
masonry construction.
Division 8 Section “Door Hardware” for door hardware and weatherstripping.
Division 9 Section “Painting” for field painting primed doors and frames.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Approval Numbers: Provide State of Florida Product Approval Numbers for exterior door assemblies.
B.
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, label compliance,
fire-resistance rating, and finishes for each type of steel door and frame specified.
C.
Shop Drawings:
1.
In addition to requirements below, provide a schedule of standard steel doors and frames using
same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings:
a.
Elevations of each door design.
b.
Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details.
c.
Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles.
d.
Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
e.
Details of each different wall opening condition.
f.
Details of anchorages, accessories, joints, and connections.
2.
State of Florida Product Approval must be applicable to actual door and frame sizes and
configurations indicated on drawings.
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081100 - 1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
3.
1.5
03/01/2010
Shop drawings shall indicate hardware locations for doors and frames based upon Steelcraft
standards. No other locations are acceptable.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
B.
Source Limitations:
manufacturer.
C.
Exterior, Hurricane-Resistant Door Assemblies: All doors opening to the outside atmosphere shall resist
the cyclonic pressures, static pressures, and missile impact loads as detailed in the Florida Building Code
test protocols TAS 201, TAS 202, and TAS 203.
1.6
Obtain standard steel doors and frames through one source from a single
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver doors and frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Projectsite storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
B.
Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs
and mullions.
C.
Store doors and frames under cover at Project site. Place units in a vertical position with heads up,
spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas
shelters that could create a humidity chamber.
1.
1.7
If wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space
between each stacked door to permit air circulation.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Field Measurements: Verify openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for standard steel frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with
integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in
time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
Ceco Door Products.
Curries Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company.
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081100 - 2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
4.
5.
2.2
03/01/2010
Hollow Metal, Inc.
Windsor Republic Doors
MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed
applications.
B.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting,
or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum
A60 (ZF180) zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating designation.
D.
Supports and Anchors: After fabricating, galvanize units to be built into exterior walls according to
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
E.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Provide items to be built into exterior walls, hot-dip galvanized according
to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
2.3
STANDARD STEEL DOORS
A.
General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth
surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with
ANSI A250.8.
1.
Design: As indicated on Drawings.
2.
Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane,
mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core that produces doors complying with ANSI A250.
3.
Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled edge
a.
4.
5.
B.
Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush (at top), inverted (at bottom), 0.042-inch- thick end
closures or channels of same material as face sheets.
Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames."
Exterior and Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from A-60 galvannealed steel sheet. Provide doors
complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model and
ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level:
1.
C.
Beveled Edge: 1/8 inch in 2 inches.
Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless), 16 gage
(.053 inch).
Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcement plates from same material as door face sheets to
comply with the following minimum sizes:
1.
Hinges: Minimum 0.123 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches wide by 6 inches longer than hinge, secured
by not less than 6 spot welds.
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081100 - 3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
2.
3.
4.
D.
2.4
03/01/2010
Pivots: Minimum 0.167 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches wide by 6 inches longer than hinge, secured by
not less than 6 spot welds.
Lock Face, Flush Bolts, Closers, and Concealed Holders: Minimum 0.067 inch thick.
All Other Surface-Mounted Hardware: Minimum 0.067 inch thick.
Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
STANDARD STEEL FRAMES
A.
General: Comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
B.
Exterior and Interior Frames: Fabricated from A-60 galvannealed steel sheet.
1.
2.
C.
Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded face corners.
Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 16 gage (.053 inch) thick steel sheet.
Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcement plates from same material as frames to comply with
the following minimum sizes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Hinges: Minimum 0.123 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches wide by 6 inches longer than hinge, secured
by not less than 6 spot welds.
Pivots: Minimum 0.167 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches wide by 6 inches longer than hinge, secured by
not less than 6 spot welds.
Lock Face, Flush Bolts, Closers, and Concealed Holders: Minimum 0.067 inch thick.
All Other Surface-Mounted Hardware: Minimum 0.067 inch thick.
D.
Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet.
E.
Jamb Anchors:
1.
2.
Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch
thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long.
Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete Masonry: minimum 3/8-inch- diameter bolts
with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat
reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
F.
Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
G.
Plaster Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016-inch thick.
2.5
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate standard steel doors and frames to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle.
Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where
practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site,
clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B.
Standard Steel Doors:
1.
Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to
escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081100 - 4
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
C.
Standard Steel Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations,
provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush,
and invisible.
Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners, unless
otherwise indicated.
Plaster Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames installed in concrete
or masonry.
Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a.
b.
5.
Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare standard steel doors and frames to receive templated mortised
hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping.
1.
2.
3.
2.6
Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame.
Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. Provide three anchors per jamb.
Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom
of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows.
Provide plastic plugs to keep holes clear during construction.
a.
D.
03/01/2010
All locations shall be based upon Steelcraft standards.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door
hardware.
Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications
for door and frame preparation for hardware. Locate hardware according to ANSI A250.8.
STEEL FINISHES
A.
General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1.
B.
Galvannealed Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free
of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to
be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair
paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.
1.
C.
Finish standard steel door and frames after assembly.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,
complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below immediately after surface
preparation and pretreatment. Apply a smooth coat of even consistency to provide a uniform dry film
thickness of not less than 0.7 mils.
1.
Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying
with ANSI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate;
compatible with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated; and providing a sound
foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081100 - 5
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of standard steel doors and frames.
1.
2.
3.2
Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations of standard steel
frame connections before frame installation.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory.
B.
Prior to installation and with installation spreaders in place, adjust and securely brace standard steel door
frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
3.3
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb
perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of
wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and
perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to
floor.
Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door hardware.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Provide doors and frames of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated. Install standard steel
doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings
and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Standard Steel Frames: Install standard steel frames for doors of size and profile indicated. Comply with
SDI 105.
1.
Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors
are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth
and undamaged.
a.
b.
2.
Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly
set and secured.
Check plumb, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary
to comply with installation tolerances.
In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion
anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081100 - 6
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
3.
Installation Tolerances: Adjust standard steel door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and
plumb to the following tolerances:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from
jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to
plane of wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel
lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
Standard Steel Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below.
Shim as necessary.
1.
Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.4
03/01/2010
Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch.
Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection.
Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including
standard steel doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B.
Clean grout and other bonding material off standard steel doors and frames immediately after installation.
C.
Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat
and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.
D.
Galvannealed Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 081100
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081100 - 7
This page left intentionally blank
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
SECTION 083613
SECTIONAL DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following types of overhead sectional doors:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.03
A.
1.04
A.
B.
Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for lock cylinders and keying.
Division 9 Section "Painting" for field-applied paint finish.
Division 26 Sections for electrical service and connections for powered operators, and accessories.
Division 26 Sections for disconnect switches and circuit breakers for powered operators.
DEFINITIONS
Operation Cycle: One complete cycle of a door begins with the door in the closed position. The door is
then moved to the open position and back to the closed position.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Structural Performance: Provide overhead sectional doors capable of withstanding the effects of gravity
loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation of door
components:
1.
Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) to meet cladding design loads specified on
plans, acting inward and outward.
2.
Installation in accordance with listed approved products.
Operation-Cycle Requirements: Design overhead sectional door components and operator to operate for
not less than 20,000 cycles and for 10 cycles per day.
1.
1.05
Service doors.
Insulated service doors.
Include tamperproof cycle counter.
SUBMITTALS
OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOORS
083613- 1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
A.
Product Data: For each type and size of overhead sectional door and accessory. Include details of
construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. Provide
roughing-in diagrams, operating instructions, and maintenance information. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Setting drawings, templates, and installation instructions for built-in or embedded anchor devices.
Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs.
Motors: Show nameplate data and ratings; characteristics; mounting arrangements; size and
location of winding termination lugs, conduit entry, and grounding lug; and coatings.
Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's
data sheets.
1.
C.
03/01/2010
Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems. Differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring and between components provided by door
manufacturer and those provided by others.
Samples for Verification: Of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated
below and of same thickness and material indicated for Work. Where finishes involve normal color and
texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Panels: 12-inch (300-mm) length.
Bottom Bar: 6-inch (150-mm) length.
Guides: 6-inch (150-mm) length.
Brackets: 6 inches (150 mm) square.
Laminate-Clad Counter Panel Product: 6 inches (150 mm) square, for each type, color, pattern,
and surface finish, laminated to core.
D.
Installer Certificates:
requirements.
E.
Oversize Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire-rated and exceeding
limitations of labeled assemblies, submit certification of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction that each door and frame assembly has been constructed to comply with design, materials,
and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction.
1.06
Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the
overhead sectional door manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this
Project.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain overhead sectional doors through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.
C.
Obtain operators and controls from the overhead sectional door manufacturer.
Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are listed and
labeled.
1.
2.
The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" as
defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOORS
083613- 2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
2.01
03/01/2010
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.02
A.
Clopay Building Products Co.
Overhead Door Corporation.
Raynor Garage Doors.
Roll-Lite Door Corp.; Div. of Clopay Building Products Co.
Wayne-Dalton Corp.
DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
Door Curtain: Fabricate overhead sectional door curtain of interlocking panels, designed to withstand
wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise
indicated, provide panels of material thickness recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size,
and type of door indicated, and as follows:
1.
Steel Door Curtain Panels: Structural-quality, cold-rolled galvanized steel sheets complying with
ASTM A 653, with G90 (ASTM A 653M, with Z275) zinc coating.
2.
Insulation: Fill panel with manufacturer's standard rigid cellular polystyrene or polyurethanefoam-type thermal insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed
indices of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely
within metal panel faces.
Inside Curtain Panel Face: To match material of outside metal curtain slat and as follows:
3.
a.
B.
2.03
A.
Galvanized Steel Sheet Thickness: Not less than 22 guage.
Bottom Bar: Consisting of 2 angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch (38 by 38 by 3 mm)
thick, either galvanized or stainless-steel or aluminum extrusions to suit type of panels.
ACCESSORIES
Integral Frame and Fascia: Provide welded assemblies of the following sheet metal:
1.
Fabricate of not less than 0.064-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with G90
(Z275) zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 653 (ASTM A 653M).
B.
Integral Sills: Fabricate sills as integral part of frame assembly of same sheet metal, but not less than
0.078 inch (2.0 mm) thick.
C.
Weatherseals: Provide replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets fitted
to bottom and at top of exterior doors, unless otherwise indicated. At door head, use 1/8-inch- (3-mm-)
thick, replaceable, continuous sheet secured to inside of curtain coil hood.
1.
2.
Provide motor-operated doors with combination bottom weatherseal and sensor edge.
In addition, provide replaceable, adjustable, continuous, flexible, 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick seals of
flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene at door jambs for a weathertight installation.
OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOORS
083613- 3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
D.
03/01/2010
Push/Pull Handles: For push-up-operated or emergency-operated doors, provide galvanized steel lifting
handles on each side of door.
1.
Provide pull-down straps or pole hooks for doors more than 84 inches (2130 mm) high.
E.
Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock,
located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.
F.
Fabricate locking device assembly with lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam plate, and
adjustable locking bar to engage through slots in tracks.
1.
Locking Bars: Single-jamb side, operable from inside only.
G.
Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock.
H.
Where door unit is power operated, provide safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door
is locked.
I.
Provide automatic-opening device inoperative during normal door operations, with governor unit
complying with requirements of NFPA 80, with easily tested and reset release mechanism, and designed
to be activated by the following:
1.
2.04
Governor: Oscillating type.
COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM
A.
General: Counterbalance doors by means of adjustable-tension steel helical torsion spring, mounted
around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to door curtain with required barrel rings.
Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.
B.
Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of hot-formed, structural-quality, welded or seamless
carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion
of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. (2.5 mm/m) of span under full load.
C.
Provide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size
springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel.
Provide cast-steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft.
D.
Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and
carry torsional load.
E.
Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design, either cast-iron or cold-rolled
steel plate with bell-mouth guide groove for curtain.
2.05
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if
they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are
not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range
of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOORS
083613- 4
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
2.06
A.
STEEL AND GALVANIZED STEEL FINISHES
Factory Primer for Field Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer, compatible with field-applied
finish according to coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and
minimum dry film thickness.
1.
2.07
03/01/2010
Apply to ferrous surfaces except zinc-coated metal.
ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS
A.
General: Provide electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by
door manufacturer for door and operational life specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor
controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control
devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
Disconnect Device: Provide hand-operated disconnect or mechanism for automatically engaging
sprocket-chain operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor,
without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount disconnect and operator so they are accessible from floor
level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator
is engaged.
D.
Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without
affecting emergency auxiliary operator.
E.
Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with
NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V, ac or dc.
F.
Door-Operator Type: Provide wall-, hood-, or bracket-mounted, jackshaft, gear-head-type door operator
unit consisting of electric motor, enclosed worm-gear running-in-oil primary drive, chain and sprocket
secondary drive, and quick disconnect-release for manual operation.
G.
Electric Motors: Provide high-starting torque, reversible, continuous-duty, Class A insulated, electric
motors, complying with NEMA MG 1, with overload protection, sized to start, accelerate, and operate
door in either direction, from any position, at not less than 2/3 fps (0.2 m/s) or more than 1 fps (0.3 m/s),
without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
H.
Type: Polyphase, medium-induction type.
Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated.
Coordinate wiring requirements and electric characteristics of motors with building electrical
system.
Provide open dripproof-type motor, and controller with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.
Provide totally enclosed, nonventilated or fan-cooled motors, fitted with plugged drain, and
controller with NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure where indicated.
Remote-Control Station: Provide momentary-contact, 3-button control station with push-button controls
labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop."
1.
2.
Provide interior units, full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose
NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.
Provide exterior units, full-guarded, standard-duty, surface-mounted, weatherproof type,
NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure, key operated.
OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOORS
083613- 5
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
I.
03/01/2010
Obstruction Detection Device: Provide each motorized door with indicated external automatic safety
sensor able to protect full width of door opening. Activation of sensor immediately stops and reverses
downward door travel.
1.
Sensor Edge: Provide each motorized door with an automatic safety sensor edge, located within
astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor immediately stops and
reverses downward door travel. Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up
reel or self-sectional cable.
a.
b.
Provide pneumatically actuated automatic bottom bar.
Provide electrically actuated automatic bottom bar.
1)
Self-Monitoring Laser Eye Type:
device.
Provide self-monitoring, 4-wire configured
J.
Limit Switches: Provide adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically
stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions.
K.
Provide electric operators with ADA-compliant audible alarm and visual indicator lights.
L.
Radio Control: Provide radio control system consisting of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
M.
3-channel universal coaxial receiver to open, close, and stop door, 1 per operator.
Multifunction remote control.
Remote antenna mounting kit.
Coordinate RF location with Owner’s vehicle requirements.
Provide interface for variable interlock timers for each door connected to exhaust system for apparatus
bays.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
3.02
A.
3.03
A.
INSTALLATION
General: Install door and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold
strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's
written instructions, and as specified.
ADJUSTING
Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion
and fitting weather tight for entire perimeter.
DEMONSTRATION
Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup services and to
train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below:
1.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOORS
083613- 6
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
03/01/2010
Test door closing when activated by detector or alarm connected fire-release system. Reset
door-closing mechanism after successful test.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and
shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, preventive maintenance, and procedures for testing and
resetting release devices.
Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."
Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
Schedule training with Owner with at least 3 days' advance notice.
END OF SECTION 083613
OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOORS
083613- 7
This page left intentionally blank
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART I - GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. The work in this section shall include furnishing of all items of finish hardware as hereinafter
specified or obviously necessary to complete the building, except those items that are specifically
excluded from this section of the specification.
1.02
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Steel Doors and Frames
1.03
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Furnish labor and material to complete hardware work indicated, as specified herein, or as may be
required by actual conditions at building.
B. Include all necessary screws, bolts, expansion shields, other devices, if necessary, as required for
proper hardware application. The hardware supplier shall assume all responsibility for correct
quantities.
C. Hardware shall meet the requirements of Federal, State and Local codes having jurisdiction over
this project, notwithstanding any real or apparent conflict therewith in these specifications.
D. Fire-rated openings:
1. Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance with A.I.A. (NBFU) Pamphlet No.
80, NFPA Standards NO. 101, UBC 702 (1997) and UL10C. This requirement takes
precedence over other requirements for such hardware. Provide only hardware that has been
tested and listed by UL for the types and sizes of doors required, and complies with the
requirements of the door and door frame labels.
2. Where panic exit devices are required on fire-rated doors, provide supplementary marking on
door UL label indicating Fire Door to be equipped with fire exit hardware and provide UL
label on exit device indicating “Fire Exit Hardware”.
E. Fasteners:
1. Hardware as furnished shall conform to published templates generally prepared for machine
screw installation.
2. Furnish each item complete with all screws required for installation. Typically, all exposed
screws installation.
3. Insofar as practical, furnished concealed type fasteners for hardware units that have exposed
screws shall be furnished with Phillips flat head screws, finished to match adjacent hardware.
4. Door closers and exit devices to be installed with closed head through bolts (sex bolts).
F.
Exterior openings
1. Provide hardware for hurricane openings in compliance with local jurisdiction.
This requirement takes precedence over other requirements for such hardware. Provide only
hardware that has been tested and listed by local authority for the types and sizes of doors
required, and complies with the requirements of the door and door frame. Coordinate Section
(08710) Finish Hardware with the Steel Doors and Frames (08110).
Door Hardware
087100-1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
1.04
03/01/2010
QUALITY
ASSURANCE
A. The supplier to be a directly franchised distributor of the products to be furnished and have in their
employ an AHC (Architectural Hardware Consultant). This person is to be available for
consultation to the architect, owner and the general contractor at reasonable times during the
course of work.
B. The finish hardware supplier shall prepare and submit to the architect six (6) copies of a complete
schedule identifying each door and each set number, following the numbering system and not
creating any separate system himself. He shall submit the schedule for review, make corrections as
directed and resubmit the corrected schedule for final approval. Approval of schedule will not
relieve Contractor of the responsibility for furnishing all necessary hardware, including the
responsibility for furnishing correct quantities.
C. No manufacturing orders shall be placed until detailed schedule has been submitted to the architect
and written approval received.
D. After hardware schedule has been approved, furnish templates required by manufacturing
contractors for making proper provisions in their work for accurate fitting, finishing hardware
setting. Furnish templates in ample time to facilitate progress of work.
E. Hardware supplier shall have an office and warehouse facilities to accommodate the materials used
on this project. The supplier must be an authorized distributor of the products specified.
F.
The hardware manufactures are to supply both a pre-installation class as well as a post-installation
walk-thru. This is to insure proper installation and provide for any adjustments or replacements of
hardware as required.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Wrap, protect finishing hardware items for shipment. Deliver to manufacturing contractors
hardware items required by them for their application; deliver balance of hardware to job; store in
designated location. Each item shall be clearly marked with its intended location.
1.06
WARRANTY
A. The material furnished shall be warranted for one year after installation or longer as the individual
manufacturer’s warranty permits.
B. The manufacturer against failure due to defective materials and workmanship shall warrant
overhead door closers in writing for a period of ten (10) years. Commencing on the Date of Final
Completion and Acceptance, and in the event of failure, the manufacture is to promptly repair or
replace the defective with no additional cost to the Owner.
PART II - PRODUCTS
2.01
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. To the greatest extent possible, obtain each kind of hardware from only one manufacturer.
C. All numbers and symbols used herein have been taken from the current catalogues of the following
manufacturers.
Door Hardware
087100-2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
PRODUCT
ACCEPTABLE
MANUFACTURER
ACCEPTABLE
SUBSTITUTE
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Ives
Schlage Locks
Best Access
Von Duprin
LCN
Ives
Hager, Stanley, Bommer
None (Owners Standard)
None (Owners Standard)
None (Owners Standard)
None (Owners Standard)
Rockwood, Hager
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
Hinges
Locks & Latches
Keying
Exit Devices
Door Closers
Wall Stops/Floor
Stops, Flushbolts
Kick Plates
Threshold/Weather-strip
Silencers
Key Cabinet
Standalone Access Control
Ives
National Guard
Ives
Lund
Alarm Lock - Trilogy Series
Rockwood, Hager
Pemko, Zero
Rockwood, Hager
Key Control
None (Owners Standard)
C. If material manufactured by other than that specified or listed herewith as an equal, is to be bid
upon, permission must be requested from the architect seven (7) days prior to bidding. If
substitution is allowed, it will be so noted by addendum.
2.02
FINISH OF HARDWARE:
A. Exterior Hinges to be Stainless Steel (32D), Interior Hinges to be Satin Chrome (26D). Door
Closers to be Aluminum. Locks to be Stainless Steel (32D), Exit Devices to be Stainless Steel
(32D). Overhead Holders to be Stainless Steel (32D), Flat Goods to be Stainless Steel (32D) and
the Thresholds to be Mill Finish Aluminum.
2.03
HINGES AND PIVOTS:
A. Exterior butts shall be Stainless Steel. Butts on all out swinging doors shall be furnished with nonremovable pins (NRP).
B. Interior butts shall be as listed.
C. Doors 5’ or less in height shall have two (2) butts. Furnish one (1) additional butt for each 2’6” in
height or fraction thereof. Dutch door shall have two (2) butts per leaf.
2.04
KEYING:
A. Equip locks and cylinders with Best Access small format interchangeable core cylinders.
B. All bittings shall be issued by lock manufacture per owners instructions and keyed to the owners
existing master key system.
C. Provide Two (2) each change keys per lock and Six (6) each grand master, master keys, two (2)
construction and two (2) permanent control keys.
D. Hardware supplier to provide temporary cylinders or cores during the construction phase. The
contractor is to change out the temporary cylinders for the permanent cylinders.
2.05
LOCKSETS:
A. Locksets shall be Heavy Duty Cylindrical type, unless specified otherwise, in “ND” Series, Lever
designs as manufactured by Schlage Lock Company.
1.
Acceptable substitutions:
A. None (Owners Standard)
Door Hardware
087100-3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
2.06
EXIT DEVICES:
A. Exit devices shall be Von Duprin 98 Series in types and functions specified. All devices must be
listed under “Panic Hardware” in accident equipment list of Underwriters Laboratories. All
labeled doors with “Fire Exit Hardware” must have labels attached and be in strict accordance with
Underwriters Laboratories.
B. Exit devices shall be tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 test requirements by a BHMA certified testing
laboratory. A written certification showing successful completion of a minimum of 1,000,000
cycles must be provided.
C. Surface strikes shall be roller type and come complete with a plate underneath to prevent
movement. And shall be provided with a dead-latching feature to prevent latch bolt tampering.
1.
2.07
03/01/2010
Acceptable substitutions:
A. None (Owners Standard)
DOOR CLOSERS:
A. Closers shall be LCN 1461 Series having non-ferrous covers, forged steel arms separate valves for
adjusting backcheck, closing and latching cycles and adjustable spring to provide up to 50%
increase in spring power. Closers shall be furnished with parallel arm mounted on all doors
opening into corridors or other public spaces and shall be mounted to permit 180 degrees door
swing wherever wall conditions permit. Furnish with non-hold open arms unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Door closer cylinders shall be of high strength cast iron construction to provide low wear operating
capabilities of internal parts throughout the life of the installation. All door closers shall be tested
to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 test requirements by a BHMA certified testing laboratory. A written
certification showing successful completion of a minimum of 10,000,000 cycles must be provided.
C. Door closers shall utilize temperature stable fluid capable of withstanding temperature ranges of
120 degrees Fahrenheit to -30 degrees Fahrenheit, without requiring seasonal adjustment of closer
speed to properly close the door. Closers for fire-rated doors shall be provided with temperature
stabilizing fluid that complies with the standards UBC 7-2 (1997) and UL 10C.
D. Door closers shall incorporate tamper resistant non-critical screw valves of V-slot design to reduce
possible clogging from particles within the closer. Closers shall have separate and independent
screw valve adjustments for latch speed, general speed, and hydraulic backcheck. Backcheck shall
be properly located so as to effectively slow the swing of the door at a minimum of 10 degrees in
advance of the dead stop location to protect the door frame and hardware from damage. Pressure
relief valves (PRV) are not acceptable.
1.
Acceptable substitutions:
A. None (Owners Standard)
2.08
TRIM AND PLATES:
A. Kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates, shall be .050 gauge with 32D finish. Kick plates to be
10” high, mop plates to be 4” high. All plates shall be two (2) inches less full width of door.
B. Push plates, pull plates, door pulls, and miscellaneous door trim shall be shown in the hardware
schedule.
2.09
DOOR STOPS:
A. Doorstops shall be furnished for all doors to prevent damage to doors or hardware from striking
adjacent walls or fixtures. Wall bumpers equal to Ives WS407 Series are preferred, but where not
Door Hardware
087100-4
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
practical furnish floor stops equal to Ives FS436 or FS438 series. Where conditions prohibit the
use of either wall or floor type stops, furnish surface mounted overhead stops equal to Glynn
Johnson, 450 Series.
2.10
THRESHOLDS AND WEATHERSTRIP:
A. Thresholds and weather-strip shall be as listed in the hardware schedule.
2.11
DOOR SILENCERS:
A. Furnish rubber door silencers equal to Ives SR64 for all new interior hollow metal frames, (2) per
pair and (3) per single door frame.
PART III - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION:
A. All hardware shall be applied and installed in accordance with the Finish Hardware schedule. Care
shall be exercised not to mar or damage adjacent work.
B. Contractor to provide a secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed.
Control the handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable, so
that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after
installation.
C. No hardware is to be installed until the hardware manufactures have provided a pre-installation
class to insure proper installation of the specified products. A post installation inspection by a
manufacturer’s representative will be provided to insure proper installation.
3.02
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Contractor shall adjust all hardware in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions. Prior to
turning project to owner, contractor shall clean and make any final adjustments to the finish
hardware.
3.03
PROTECTION:
A. Contractor shall protect the hardware, as it is stored on construction site in a covered and dry
place.
B. Contractor shall protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase.
3.04
HARDWARE SCHEDULE:
A. The following schedule is furnished for whatever assistance it may afford the contractor; do not
consider it as entirely inclusive. Should any particular door or item be omitted in any scheduled
hardware group, provide door or item with hardware same as required for similar purposes.
Quantities listed are for each pair of doors or for each single door.
B. This hardware schedule was prepared by.
Ingersoll Rand Security Technology
4385 SE 57th Lane
Ocala, FL 34480
Ph: 352-732-6795
Hardware Group No. 1 – 101,
Door Hardware
087100-5
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:
Quantity
Description
3
EA HINGE
1
EA STOREROOM LOCK
1
EA SFIC RIM CYLINDER
1
EA WALL STOP
3
EA SILENCERS
Model Number
3PB1 4.5 X 4.5
ND80BD JUP
80-159
WS407CCV
SR64
End Section 087100
Door Hardware
087100-6
03/01/2010
Finish
630
626
626
630
GRY
Mfr
IVE
SCH
SCH
IVE
IVE
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
SECTION 089000 - LOUVERS AND VENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers.
Division 8 Section "Metal Doors and Frames" for louvers in hollow-metal doors and frames.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this
Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
B.
Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to channels in
jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Structural Performance: Provide louvers capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the
following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation
of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent
damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act on vertical projection of
louvers.
1.
2.
1.5
Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on structural plans.
Missile Impact Loads: Provide large and small hurricane missile protection in accordance with the
Florida Building Code, Section 1626 – Impact Tests for Windborne Debris.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated
B.
Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments
to other Work. Show blade profiles, angles, and spacing.
089000-1
LOUVERS AND VENTS
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
1. For installed louvers and vents indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data
including anchorage to structure (fastener size, type, and spacing) signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of metal finish required.
D.
Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
E.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing
agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of louver.
1.
1.6
Provide State of Florida Product Approval number or NOA.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents through one source from a single manufacturer where
indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.
B.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
C.
1.7
AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work,
establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating louvers without field measurements.
Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established
dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements including masonry opening details indicated on
drawings, provide products by one of the following:
1.
Louvers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Construction Specialties, Inc. (Basis of Design)
Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC.
Greenheck, Inc.
Industrial Louvers, Inc.
089000-2
LOUVERS AND VENTS
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
2.2
03/01/2010
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T5 or T-52.
B.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for
forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
C.
Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, alloy 319.
D.
Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel, unless otherwise
indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials.
1.
2.
Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.
Use Phillips pan-head screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Post installed Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, made from
stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads
imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed, for masonry, as determined by testing per
ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
F.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.3
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for
shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B.
Maintain equal louver blade spacing to produce uniform appearance.
C.
Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for
fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.
1. Frame Type: Channel, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.
E.
Where indicated, provide subsills made of same material as louvers or extended sills for recessed louvers.
F.
Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view,
unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members
necessary.
2.4
FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS
A.
Horizontal Hurricane-Resistant Louver:
1. Products:
a.
2.
Construction Specialties, Inc. Model DHC-5704 (Basis of Design)
Louver Depth: 5" overall assembly including missile protection system.
089000-3
LOUVERS AND VENTS
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: As required to comply with structural performance
requirements, but not less than 0.060 inch for blades and 0.075 inch for frames.
4.
Performance Requirements:
b.
2.5
Free Area: Not less than 33%, based upon actual louver size indicated on drawings.
LOUVER SCREENS
A.
General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.
1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face.
2. Screening Type: Insect screening (Not required with Construction Specialties louver due to missile
screen).
B.
Secure screens to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6 inches from
each corner and at 12 inches o.c.
C.
Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are
attached. Reinforce extruded-aluminum screen frames at corners with clips.
Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached.
Type: Rewirable frames with a driven spline or insert for securing screen mesh.
Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers:
1. Insect Screening: Aluminum, charcoal, 18 x 16 square mesh, 0.011-inch wire.
2.6
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Finish louvers after assembly.
2.7
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by the Aluminum Association for
designating aluminum finishes.
B.
High-Performance Organic-Coating Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited
chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as
specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating
and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
1. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard two-coat, thermocured system
consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing
not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2605.
089000-4
LOUVERS AND VENTS
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. Color shall match
approved storefront and windows. Contractor shall provide available finish samples for these (3)
elements at the same time.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of
anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such
items to Project site.
INSTALLATION
A.
Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
B.
Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required
to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
C.
Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.
D.
Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.
E.
Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence
remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make
required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
F.
Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy
coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar
metals.
G.
Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where
weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants
applied during louver installation.
3.4
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove
fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate until final cleaning.
B.
Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to
finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.
089000-5
LOUVERS AND VENTS
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
C.
03/01/2010
Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of
corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged
units and replace with new units.
1.
Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and
is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.
END OF SECTION 089000
089000-6
LOUVERS AND VENTS
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
SECTION 08 95 43 - OPENINGS/VENTS/FOUNDATION FLOOD VENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.0
A.
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including the Conditions of
the Contract (General Section 00 72 00, Supplementary Section 00 73 00, and
other Conditions, if any) and Divisions 1 as appropriate, apply to the Work
specified in this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Certified Flood Vents specified or indicated on the drawings to complete the
project.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 03 15 00: Concrete Forming and Accessories
2.
Section 04 05 23 Masonry Accessories
3.
Section 06 48 00: Wood Frames and Framing (If applicable)
4.
Section 08 36 00: Panel doors / Overhead Doors (If applicable)
5.
Section 10 70 00: Exterior Specialties
C.
Substitutions:
1.
Approval of alternative and/or substitute products shall be considered only
under terms and conditions specified in Sections 00 26 00 Procurement
Substitution Procedures, Section 00 43 25, Section 01 40 00 Quality
Requirements, Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements, and 01 80 00
Performance Requirements. This paragraph applies when specific manufacturers’
names follow a specified manufacturer’s name in Part 2.3, or when no
manufacturers’ names follow a specified manufacturer’s name in Part 2.3.
2.
Requests for substitution shall be in writing and received by the Architect at
least ten days prior to the bid date. The acceptance of any substitutions shall
be by addendum. Unauthorized substitutions shall not be accepted.
3.
The quality of all vents has been clearly indicated by the manufacturer’s name
and product number.
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)
1. ASCE/SEI 24-98, Flood Resistant Design and Construction, Latest
2. ASCE/SEI 24-05, Flood Resistant Design and Construction, Latest
B.
Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA)
1. FEMA, 44-CFR, Part 59-60 and 60.3 National Flood Insurance Program (NFIP),
Latest
FOUNDATION FLOOD VENTS
089543 - 1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
C.
Federal Emergency Management Agency, Federal Insurance Administration (FEMA/FIA)
1. FEMA/FIA-TB 1-2008, Openings in Foundation Walls and Walls of Enclosures for
Buildings Located in Special Flood Hazard Areas, Latest
D.
International Code Council National Evaluation Service (NES)
1. NER-624, National Evaluation Report No. NER-624. July 2007
E.
International Code Council National Evaluation Service (NES)
1. ESR-2074, National Evaluation Report No. ESR-2074. February 2008
F.
International Code Council ICC-ES Acceptance Criteria for Automatic Foundation Flood
Vents (AC-364). October 2007
G.
Federal Emergency Management Association’s MEMO W-08-001. January 2008
H.
International Building Code, Latest
I
BOCA National Code, Latest
J.
Standard Building Code
K.
International Residential Code, Latest
L.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
a. Standard No. 101, “Life Safety Code”, Latest
M. Governing Codes:
a. Where conflict occurs between above codes and standards, the most stringent
requirement governs.
N. Underwriter’s Laboratories:
a. Test for Fire Dampers in conjunction with flood vents.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00:
B.
A complete and detailed description of all Foundation Vents shall be submitted with all
pertinent data from the NES Testing Service showing the vents are Certified. Catalog cuts
and drawings shall be submitted as well as installation instructions.
Vents submitted for approval without all of the above shall be considered incomplete and will
NOT be reviewed.
C.
1.4
A.
WARRANTY
Any and all vents manufactured shall be subject to a one year limited warranty. See
manufacturer’s data for complete details.
FOUNDATION FLOOD VENTS
089543 - 2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
2.3
MANUFACTURER
Products listed are manufactured by the following:
1. Smart VENT, Inc.
450 Andbro Drive
Pitman, NJ 08071
PH: 1-877-441-8368 / Fax: 1-856-612-5000
GENERAL
Items are specified by use of manufacturer’s catalog numbers. Vents by other named
manufacturers are still required to meet all the criteria listed for the product and will be
reviewed for acceptance against specified items.
MATERIALS
A.
General:
1. Vents shall be constructed of Stainless Steel formed and smooth-welded
construction. The frame shall be rigid and designed to be installed in masonry or
framed walls, stud walls or garage doors that range in thickness from 2” to 16”. It
shall have a pivoting door assembly that is fitted with two patented sealed floats that
immediately and automatically release the door upon contact with rising water to
relieve unbalanced lateral forces on foundation walls. The door shall swing
open to provide two horizontal slot openings with a total combined unobstructed
area of 76 square inches. The lower slot provides a 3” clear opening. One Single
unit shall be used to relieve 200 square feet of enclosed area. The Double or
“Stacking Model” shall be used to relieve 400 square feet of enclosed area per unit.
B.
Flood Vent Types:
1. Flush or Solid Insulated Door:
Flood VENT Model # 1540-520
2. Accessories:
a. 8”-12” Adjustable Sleeve/Trim #1540-531-12
b. 12”-15” Adjustable Sleeve/Trim #1540-531-15
c. 8”-12” Sleeve Only #1540-532-12
d. 12”-15” Sleeve Only #1540-532-15
e. 16” x 16” x 6” adjustable sleeve 6” to 9” wall thickness #1540-531Stacker
(Note: Sleeves should be used in ‘un-filled’ masonry
Fire Walls and where ‘air-space’ is required on Exterior Walls)
f. Interior Trim Flange #1540-533
g. Interior Trim Flange #1540-573
h. Interior Trim Flange/Sleeve #1540-573-9
FOUNDATION FLOOD VENTS
089543 - 3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
i.
j.
k.
C.
07/09/2010
Vinyl Buck(s) #1540-800 Series
For poured concrete walls Sizes range from 5.5” to 12”
Specify wall thickness for exact or nominal sizes
Use in conjunction with SV models #1540-510 or #1540-520 encased in
Buck
Vinyl Buck Extension #1540-800 - 2”
Powder-Coating #38/10130 – Black, White, Gray, or Wheat
Check with Factory for availability of other colors.
Openings Size Requirements (RWO):
1. Single units can be installed in an 8 ¼” x 16 ¼” opening or 8 ¾” x 14 ½” opening.
2. Double units require a 16 ¼” x 16 ⅜” opening.
3. Quad Units require a 33” x 16 ⅜” opening.
4. Designed to fit openings in modular masonry construction; and can easily be
adapted to framed walls or garage doors
D.
Natural Ventilation:
1. Free Area (Natural Ventilation): Screen shall have ¼ inch x ¼ inch
(6.35mm x 6.35mm) square perforations.
2. Single models #1540-510 and #1540- 514 each yield 51 square inches
(32.903 sq. mm) of net free area to supply natural ventilation.
3. Stacking models #1540-511 yield 102 square inches (65.806 sq. mm)
of natural ventilation.
E.
Flood Relief:
1. There shall be a minimum of two vents on different sides of each enclosed area.
2. Single models #1540-510, #1540-514, #1540-520, #1540-524, 1540-570, and
#1540-574 shall each disperse 200 sq. ft. (18.6 sq. m) of water in an enclosed area.
3. Stacking models #1540-511, and #1540-521 shall each disperse 400 sq. ft.
(37.2 sq. m) of water in an enclosed area.
4. The Quad models #1540-550 (2 ea #1540-511) and #1540-560
(2 ea. #1540-521) shall each disperse 800 sq. ft. (74.4 sq. m) of water in an
enclosed area.
F.
Installation:
1. Stainless Steel straps, four for each vent, and masonry or concrete
Urethane base adhesive.
2. Adjustable wrench for thru-bolted models and screwdriver for stud wall models.
3. NOTE: caulk may be used to seal certain areas that require extra attention; but,
only Fire-Rated caulk shall be used on Fire-Rated walls or openings.
G.
Maintenance Tools: Follow Smart VENT Manufacturer’s Maintenance Procedure
1. Requires thin blade to release float pins.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
FOUNDATION FLOOD VENTS
089543 - 4
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/2010
A.
General Contractor to verify vents are ready to receive work, and
dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by manufacturers.
B.
Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2
A.
INSTALLATION
General:
1. Install each vent in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions
2.
3.
4.
5.
and recommendations spaced evenly around foundation perimeter,
maximum 12 inches above grade to bottom of vent.
Install one single height flood vent for every 200 sq. ft. of enclosed space
below floodplain.
Install one double height flood vent for every 400 sq. ft. of enclosed space
below floodplain.
Install one quad flood vent for every 800 sq. ft. of enclosed space
below floodplain.
Adjust flood vents for proper operation.
****END OF SECTION****
FOUNDATION FLOOD VENTS
089543 - 5
This page left intentionally blank
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
SECTION 092400 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Metal lath and accessories.
Plastic accessories.
Portland cement plaster.
Stucco finishes.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B.
Product Data for each product specified.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver cementitious materials to Project site in original packages, containers, or bundles, labeled with
manufacturer's name, product brand name, and lot number.
B.
Store materials inside, under cover, and dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination,
aging, corrosion, and damage from construction traffic and other causes.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Requirements, General: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 926 for application standards
and recommendations of plaster manufacturer for environmental conditions before, during, and after plaster
application.
B.
Warm-Weather Requirements: Protect plaster against uneven and excessive evaporation and from strong
flows of dry air, both natural and artificial. Apply and cure plaster as required by climatic and job conditions
to prevent dry out during cure period. Provide suitable coverings, moist curing, barriers to deflect sunlight
and wind, or combinations of these, as required.
C.
Exterior Plaster Work: Do not apply plaster when ambient temperature is below 40 deg F.
D.
Protect contiguous work from soiling and moisture deterioration caused by plastering. Provide temporary
covering and other provisions necessary to minimize harmful spattering of plaster on other work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400 - 1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
1.
Expanded-Metal Lath:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Alabama Metal Industries Corp. (AMICO).
California Expanded Metal Products Co.
Dale//Incor Industries, Inc.
Dietrich Industries, Inc.
Flannery, Inc.
Fry Reglet Corporation.
Gordon, Inc.
Metalex (Keene Products).
National Gypsum Co.
Pittcon Industries.
Stockton Products.
Unimast, Inc.
United States Gypsum Co.
Western Metal Lath Co.
Plastic Accessories:
a.
b.
c.
4.
Alabama Metal Industries Corp. (AMICO).
California Expanded Metal Products Co.
Dale//Incor Industries, Inc.
Marino/Ware; Division of Ware Industries, Inc.
Phillips Manufacturing Company.
Unimast, Inc.
Western Metal Lath Co.
Metal Accessories:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
3.
03/01/2010
Alabama Metal Industries Corp. (AMICO).
Plastic Components, Inc.
Vinyl Corp.
Stucco:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
California Stucco Products Corp.
Florida Stucco Corp.
Highland Stucco.
IPA Systems, Inc.
United States Gypsum Co.
2.2 METAL SUPPORTS FOR SUSPENDED CEILINGS
A.
Suspended Furring:
1.
2.
B.
Main Runners (Carrying Channels): Cold-rolled channels, 1-1/2 inches deep.
Cross Furring: Cold-rolled channels, ¾ inch deep.
Tie Wire:
1.
2.
3.
For tying main runners directly to beams or joists (where wire hangers are used between beams or
joists), use double loop of 0.1205-inch diameter wire.
For tying furring directly to concrete structure without main runners, use 0.0800-inch diameter wire.
For saddle tying cross furring to main runners use 0.0625-inch diameter wire, or double strand of
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400 - 2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
0.0475-inch diameter wire.
C.
Rod Hangers: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M), mild carbon steel, ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip
galvanized.
1.
D.
Diameter: ¼-inch
Flat Hangers: Commercial-steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch, with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip
galvanized zinc coating.
2.3 LATH
A.
Expanded-Metal Lath: Comply with ASTM C 847 for material, type, configuration, and other characteristics
indicated below.
1.
Material: Fabricate expanded-metal lath from sheet metal conforming to the following:
a.
2.
Galvanized Steel: Structural-quality, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 653, G60 (ASTM A 653M, Z180) minimum coating designation, unless otherwise
indicated.
Flat Rib Lath: Comply with the following requirements:
a.
Configuration: Rib depth of not more than 1/8 inch.
1)
B.
Weight: 3.4 lb/sq.yd.
Paper Backing: Where paper-backed lath is indicated on drawings, provide the following material factory
bonded to back of lath. Comply with FS UU-B-790, Type I, grade and style as indicated below:
1.
Vapor-Permeable Paper: Grade D, Style 2.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Comply with material provisions of ASTM C 1063 and the requirements indicated below;
coordinate depth of accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.
1.
2.
B.
Cornerbeads: Small nose cornerbeads fabricated from the following metal, with expanded flanges of largemesh diamond-metal lath allowing full plaster encasement.
1.
2.
C.
Zinc Alloy: Minimum 0.0207 inch thick.
PVC Plastic: Minimum 0.035 inch thick.
Casing Beads: Square-edged style, with expanded flanges of the following material:
1.
2.
D.
Zinc-Alloy Components: ASTM B 69, 99 percent pure zinc.
Plastic Components: ASTM D 4216, high-impact polyvinyl chloride (PVC) for building products.
Zinc Alloy: Minimum 0.0207 inch thick.
PVC Plastic: Minimum 0.035 inch thick.
Control Joints: Prefabricated, of material and type indicated below:
1.
2.
Zinc Alloy: Minimum 0.0207 inch thick.
PVC Plastic: Minimum 0.035 inch thick.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400 - 3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
3.
E.
One-Piece Type: Folded pair of nonperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration, with expanded or
perforated flanges.
Reveals, Drip Screeds, Control Screeds, and Channel Screeds: Shapes as indicated on drawings, of material
indicated below.
1.
2.
F.
03/01/2010
PVC Plastic: Minimum 0.035 inch thick.
Aluminum: Extruded alloy 6063 T5, clear anodized finish.
Lath Attachment Devices: Material and type required by ASTM C 1063 for installations indicated.
2.5 PLASTER MATERIALS
A.
Base-Coat Cements: Type as indicated below:
1.
Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I.
B.
Stucco Finish Coat: Manufacturer's standard factory-packaged stucco, including Portland cement, aggregate,
and other proprietary ingredients.
C.
Sand Aggregate for Base Coats: ASTM C 897.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, ½ inch long, free of contaminates,
manufactured for use in Portland cement plaster.
B.
Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable.
C.
Bonding Agent: ASTM C 932.
D.
Acid-Etching Solution: Muriatic acid (10 percent solution of commercial hydrochloric acid) mixed 1 part to
not less than 6 nor more than 10 parts water.
E.
Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for fastening metal lath to wood or steel members less than
0.033 inch thick.
F.
Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening metal lath to steel members 0.033 to 0.112 inch
thick.
G.
Type W, wafer head, galvanized screws, 1 inch long, for fastening metal lath to wood members.
2.7 PLASTER MIXES AND COMPOSITIONS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for base- and finish-coat mixes as applicable to plaster bases, materials,
and other requirements indicated.
B.
Base-Coat Mixes and Compositions: Proportion materials for respective base coats in parts by volume per
sum of cementitious materials for aggregates to comply with the following requirements for each method of
application and plaster base indicated. Adjust mix proportions below within limits specified to attain
workability.
C.
Fiber Content: Add fiber to following mixes after ingredients have mixed at least 2 minutes. Comply with
fiber manufacturer's written instructions but do not exceed 1 lb/cu. ft. of cementitious materials. Reduce
aggregate quantities accordingly to maintain workability.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400 - 4
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
D.
Two-Coat Work Over concrete unit masonry: ½" total thickness; base-coat proportions as indicated below:
1.
E.
Base Coat: 1 part Portland cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime, 3 to 4 parts aggregate; 3/8" thickness.
Three-Coat Work over Metal Lath: 7/8" total thickness; Base-coat proportions as indicated below:
1.
2.
F.
Scratch Coat: 1 part Portland cement, 0 to 3/4 parts lime, 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate; 3/8” thickness.
Brown Coat: 1 part Portland cement, 0 to 3/4 parts lime, 3 to 5 parts aggregate; 3/8” thickness.
Job-Mixed Finish Coats: Proportion materials for finish coats in parts by volume for cementitious materials
and parts by volume per sum of cementitious materials to comply with the following requirements:
1.
Proportions using sand aggregates as indicated below:
a.
G.
03/01/2010
1 part Portland cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime, 3 parts sand; 1/8" thickness.
Stucco Finish Coat: (May be used in lieu of above described job mixed finish coat). Add water only; comply
with stucco manufacturer’s written instructions; 1/8" thickness.
2.8 MIXING
A.
Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to comply with applicable referenced
application standard and with recommendations of plaster manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF LATH AND FURRING, GENERAL
A.
Standards: Comply with ML/SFA 920, "Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring," and with
requirements of ASTM C 1063.
B.
Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in work and for support of fixtures,
equipment services, heavy trim, and similar work to comply with details indicated or, if not otherwise
indicated, to comply with applicable written instructions of lath and furring manufacturer.
C.
Isolation: Where lathing and metal support system abuts building structure horizontally and where partition or
wall abuts overhead structure, sufficiently isolate from structural movement to prevent transfer of loading
from building structure. Install slip- or cushion-type joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral support.
1.
D.
Frame both sides of control joints independently and do not bridge joints with furring and lathing or
accessories.
Install additional framing, furring, runners, lath, and beads, as required to form openings and frames for other
work as indicated. Coordinate support system for proper support of framed work that is not indicated to be
supported independently of metal furring and lathing system.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows:
1.
Install hangers plumb and free of contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are
not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to
miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400 - 5
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
03/01/2010
effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that
interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install
supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size
supplemental suspension members and hangers to limit deflection to 1/360 of span while supporting
ceiling loads.
Rod and Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to
fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate and hanger, in a manner that will not cause
hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Secure to fastener devices that extend
through forms.
Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
Do not connect steel framing to or suspend it from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
B.
Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for ceilings so members are level to within ¼ inch
in 10 feet measured lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members.
C.
Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support.
D.
Install steel framing components for ceilings in sizes and spacings indicated but not less than that required by
the referenced steel framing and installation standards.
1.
2.
3.
Hanger Spacing: 48 inches o.c.
Main Runner (Carrying Channel) Spacing: For suspended ceilings, 36 inches o.c.
Cross-Furring Spacing: For suspended ceilings, 16 inches o.c.
3.3 LATHING
A.
Install metal lath for the following applications where plaster base coats are required. Provide appropriate
type, configuration, and weight of metal lath selected from materials indicated that comply with referenced
ML/SFA specifications and ASTM lathing installation standards.
1.
Suspended and furred ceilings and soffits using 3.4-lb/sq. yd. minimum weight, flat rib lath.
a. Wafer head screws shall penetrate wood framing a minimum of 3/4 inch. Spacing shall be
6 inches o.c. max.
2.
Vertical metal framing and furring using 3.4-lb/sq. yd. minimum weight, diamond-mesh with paper
backing.
3.4 PREPARATIONS FOR PLASTERING
A.
Clean plaster bases and substrates for direct application of plaster, removing loose material and substances
that may impair the Work.
B.
Etch concrete and concrete unit masonry surfaces indicated for direct plaster application. Scrub with acidetching solution on previously wetted surface and rinse thoroughly with clean water. Repeat application, if
necessary, to obtain adequate suction and mechanical bond of plaster (where dash coat, bonding agent, or
additive is not used).
C.
Apply bonding agent on concrete and concrete unit masonry surfaces indicated for direct plaster application;
comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for application.
D.
Install temporary grounds and screeds to ensure accurate rodding of plaster to true surfaces; coordinate with
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400 - 6
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
scratch-coat work.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF PLASTERING ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation standards for provision and location of
plaster accessories of type indicated. Miter or cope accessories at corners; install with tight joints and in
alignment. Attach accessories securely to plaster bases to hold accessories in place and in alignment during
plastering. Install accessories of type indicated at following locations:
1.
2.
3.
External Corners: Install corner reinforcement at external corners.
Terminations of Plaster: Install casing beads, unless otherwise indicated.
Control Joints: Install at locations indicated or, if not indicated, at locations complying with the
following criteria and approved by Architect:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Where an expansion or contraction joint occurs in surface of construction directly behind
plaster membrane.
Distance between Control Joints: Not to exceed 18 feet in either direction or a length-to-width
ratio of 2-1/2 to 1.
Wall Areas: Not more than 144 sq. ft.
Horizontal Surfaces: Not more than 100 sq. ft. in area.
Where plaster panel sizes or dimensions change, extend joints full width or height of plaster
membrane.
3.6 PLASTER APPLICATION
A.
Plaster Application Standard: Apply plaster materials, composition, and mixes to comply with ASTM C 926.
B.
Do not use materials that are frozen, caked, lumpy, dirty, or contaminated by foreign materials.
C.
Do not use excessive water in mixing and applying plaster materials.
D.
Flat Surface Tolerances: Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in
finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10-foot straightedge placed at any location on surface.
E.
Sequence plaster application with installation and protection of other work so that neither will be damaged by
installation of other.
F.
Plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground, unless
otherwise indicated. Where interior plaster is not terminated at metal frame by casing beads, cut base coat
free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal.
G.
Corners: Make internal corners and angles square; finish external corners flush with cornerbeads on interior
work, square and true with plaster faces on exterior work.
H.
Finish Coats: Apply finish coats to comply with the following requirements:
I.
1.
Float Finish: (Typical Finish) Apply finish coat to a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch to completely
cover base coat, uniformly floated to a true even plane with “sand float” finish.
2.
Lightly Textured Finish: Apply only where specifically indicated on drawings.
3.
Prepared Finish: Apply factory-prepared finish coats according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Moist-cure plaster base and finish coats to comply with ASTM C 926, including written instructions for time
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400 - 7
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
between coats and curing in "Annex A2 Design Considerations."
3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Cut, patch, replace, repair, and point up plaster as necessary to accommodate other work. Repair cracks and
indented surfaces. Point-up finish plaster surfaces around items that are built into or penetrate plaster
surfaces. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence,
excessive pinholes, and similar defects. Repair or replace work as necessary to comply with required visual
effects.
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A.
Remove temporary covering and other provisions made to minimize spattering of plaster on other work.
Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not to be plastered. Repair surfaces
stained, marred or otherwise damaged during plastering work. When plastering work is completed, remove
unused materials, containers, equipment, and plaster debris.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that
ensure plaster work is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 092400
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400 - 8
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
SECTION 099100 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following:
1.
2.
3.
Exposed exterior items and surfaces.
Exposed interior items and surfaces.
Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming
and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
B.
Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted
or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item
or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the
schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from paint manufacturer’s standard colors
and finishes available.
C.
Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels.
1.
1.3
Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other coderequired labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
DEFINITIONS
A.
General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.4
Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree
meter.
Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60-degree
meter.
Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree
meter.
Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a 60degree meter.
Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60-degree
meter.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers.
1.
Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and
cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by
manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
PAINTING
099100 - 1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
2.
B.
1.5
Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis
and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each
type of finish-coat material indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications
similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the
same manufacturer as the finish coats.
C.
Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample of each type of coating and
substrate required on the Project. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5.
1.
The Architect will select one room surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each type of
coating and substrate to be painted.
a.
b.
1.6
Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of wall surface.
Small Areas and Items: The Architect will designate an item or area as required.
2.
After permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated, apply coatings in this
room or to each surface according to the Schedule or as specified. Provide required sheen, color, and
texture on each surface.
3.
Final approval of colors will be from job-applied samples.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing
manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Product name or title of material.
Product description (generic classification or binder type).
Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
Thinning instructions.
Application instructions.
Color name and number.
VOC content.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient
temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials
and residue.
1.
1.7
03/01/2010
Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take
necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards
resulting from handling, mixing, and application.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
PAINTING
099100 - 2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
A.
Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F.
B.
Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F.
C.
Do not apply paint in rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures
less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1.
Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and
heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Unless otherwise specified, paint materials and systems specified herein are those of PPG Pittsburgh / Porter
Paint Co. (Porter). Subject to compliance with requirements, equivalent materials and systems by one of the
following manufacturers are also acceptable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.2
Sherwin Williams
Scott Paints
Sikkens
Porter Paints
Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore).
ICI Paints
PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are
compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B.
Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified.
Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.
C.
Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect.
2.3
LEAD CONTENT
A.
2.4
The paint shall comply with the latest requirements of the Federal Government for maximum allowable lead
content. Such compliance shall be stated on the MSDS and container clearly identifying the product.
VOC COMPLIANCE
A.
Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the
following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40
CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not
apply to primers or finishes that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:
1.
2.
Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
PAINTING
099100 - 3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
3.
4.
03/01/2010
Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total
aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).
Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
Acrolein.
Acrylonitrile.
Antimony.
Benzene.
Butyl benzyl phthalate.
Cadmium.
Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.
Di-n-butyl phthalate.
Di-n-octyl phthalate.
1, 2-dichlorobenzene.
Diethyl phthalate.
Dimethyl phthalate.
Ethylbenzene.
Formaldehyde.
Hexavalent chromium.
Isophorone.
Lead.
Mercury.
Methyl ethyl ketone.
Methyl isobutyl ketone.
Methylene chloride.
Naphthalene.
Toluene (methylbenzene).
1, 1, 1-trichloroethane.
Vinyl chloride.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be
performed for compliance with paint application requirements.
1.
2.
B.
Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving
paint are thoroughly dry.
Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a
particular area.
Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the
total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to
ensure use of compatible primers.
1.
Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed
by others.
PAINTING
099100 - 4
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
3.2
03/01/2010
PREPARATION
A.
General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar
items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size
or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1.
B.
Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could
impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
1.
C.
After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers
skilled in the trades involved.
Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall
on wet, newly painted surfaces.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions
for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1.
2.
Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete and concrete masonry surfaces to be painted. Remove
efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze.
If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface
preparation.
a.
b.
3.
Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and
sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.
a.
4.
D.
Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer
immediately on delivery.
Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove
oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning
methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations.
a.
5.
Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.
Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If
surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this
condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean
with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the
shop coat.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free
of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from
coil stock by mechanical methods.
Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials
and residue.
PAINTING
099100 - 5
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
2.
3.
3.3
03/01/2010
Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during
application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain
material before using.
Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
APPLICATION
A.
General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best
suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for
painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application method.
Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer.
If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written
instructions, sand between applications.
Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until
paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners,
crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until
paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure,
and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to
manufacturer's written instructions. All metal surfaces shall be sprayed except that piping, conduit, and
ductwork may be brushed or rolled.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedule.
Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to
formation of a durable paint film.
Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector
covers, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to
maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before
the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture
with prime coat only.
Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or
grilles.
Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.
Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.
Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for
the surface or item being painted.
Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the
manufacturer for the material and texture required.
Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer
for the material and texture required.
Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading
rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer.
PAINTING
099100 - 6
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
E.
03/01/2010
Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
Exposed conduit and fittings.
Exterior switchgear.
F.
Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores
filled.
G.
Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by
others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat
appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
H.
Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface
of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs,
sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
I.
Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster.
Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other
surface imperfections.
1.
Provide satin finish for final coats.
J.
Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling,
such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections.
K.
Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint
work not complying with requirements.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner
deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied:
1.
2.
The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint material
being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified
in the presence of the Contractor.
The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by the
Owner:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
Quantitative material analysis.
Abrasion resistance.
Apparent reflectivity.
Flexibility.
Washability.
Absorption.
Accelerated weathering.
Dry opacity.
Accelerated yellowness.
Recoating.
Skinning.
Color retention.
Alkali and mildew resistance.
PAINTING
099100 - 7
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
3.
3.5
03/01/2010
The Owner may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not
comply with specified requirements. The Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from the site,
pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the rejected paint. If necessary, the
Contractor may be required to remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting
with specified paint, the 2 coatings are incompatible.
CLEANING
A.
Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials
from the site.
1.
3.6
After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by
washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by
cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
B.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings
provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.
1.
3.7
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced
painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
PAINT SCHEDULE
A.
General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated. Provide an equal
substitute for any product shown below that does not comply with the limits of VOC content listed in this
specification.
Exterior and Interior Hollow Metal Doors and Door Frames: Semi-Gloss Acrylic Enamel Finish.
2.
a.
Prime Coat: Porter Paints/PPG: 215 PORTER GUARD DTM Acrylic Metal Primer/ Finish
(135g/L); 3.0 Dry Mils.
b.
Intermediate Coat: Porter Paints/PPG; 6029 ACRI-PRO 100 SEMI-GLOSS Exterior Acrylic
Paint (184 g/L VOC); 1.2 Dry Mils.
c.
Finish Coat: Porter Paints/PPG; 6029 ACRI-PRO 100 SEMI-GLOSS Exterior Acrylic Paint
(184 g/L VOC); 1.2 Dry Mils.
Exterior Galvanized Metal: Acrylic Gloss Exterior Paint.
Preparation: Wipe down with naptha; apply Porter: 5 Galva-Prep; wash clean.
a.
Prime Coat: Porter Paints/PPG: 215 PORTER GUARD DTM Acrylic Metal Primer/ Finish
(135g/L); 3.0 Dry Mils.
b.
Intermediate Coat: Porter Paints/PPG; 2909 ACRI-PRO 100 SEMI-GLOSS Exterior Acrylic
Paint (104 g/L VOC); 2.0 to 3.0 Dry Mils.
PAINTING
099100 - 8
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
c.
03/01/2010
Finish Coat: Porter Paints/PPG; 2909 ACRI-PRO 100 SEMI-GLOSS Exterior Acrylic Paint
(104 g/L VOC); 2.0 to 3.0 Dry Mils.
3.
Exterior Siding/ Soffit/ Trim: Finish unprimed surfaces with minimum one coat high quality, alkaliresistant primer and one coat of either 100% acrylic or latex or oil based, exterior grade topcoat or two
coats high quality, alkali-resistant, 100% acrylic or latex, exterior grade topcoat within 90 days of
installation. Follow paint manufacturer's written product recommendation and written application
instructions.
4.
Exterior Stucco and Cementitious Board, Acrylic Exterior Paint.
5.
a.
Prime Coat: Porter Paints/PPG: 335 ACRI-PRO 100 Acrylic Primer (101g/L); 1.2 to 1.5 Dry
Mils.
b.
Intermediate Coat: Porter Paints/PPG; 3729 ACRI-PRO 100 Satin Exterior Acrylic Paint (151
g/L VOC); 1.3 Dry Mils.
c.
Finish Coat: Porter Paints/PPG; 3729 ACRI-PRO 100 Satin Exterior Acrylic Paint (151 g/L
VOC); 1.3 Dry Mils.
Concrete Block Waterproofing at Openings; Flat Waterproofing Coating.
a.
Main Coat: Sherwin Williams Waterproofing.
1)
6.
Interior Concrete/ Concrete Block:
a.
Prime Coat: Block Filler.
1)
b.
Porter: 9549 Porter Guard WB Acrylic Epoxy.
Exterior Exposed Concrete:
a.
Main Coat: Waterproofing.
1)
b.
BASF Hydrozo Clear 40 VOC.
Finish Coat: Anti-Graffiti System.
1)
8.
Porter: 896 Acri-Fil Block Filler.
First and Second Finish Coats: Semi-Gloss Acrylic Epoxy.
1)
7.
Loxon.
BASF Tag Guard.
Aluminum Fabrications:
a.
Finish: Powder coat: AAMA 2605-98, Superior Performing Coatings, minimum 1.2 mil. film
thickness.
1) Metal treatment: ASTM D 1730, Amorphous Chromium Phosphate Treatment (>430
mg/m2). Non-Chrome pre-treatments not permitted.
PAINTING
099100 - 9
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
2) Gloss (60 deg.): ASTM D 523/60 deg. +/- 5 units.
3) Humidity resistance: ASTM D 4585, 4000 h/38 deg/100%, few blisters, (No. 4 ASTM D714).
4) Salt spray resistance: ASTM B 117, 3000 h/5% NA. CL, few blisters, no removal of film.
5) Natural weathering:
a)
b)
c)
d)
Florida/10 year, 45 deg South/wash: a color change <5 Hunter Units.
ASTM D 4214: Chalking < No.8.
Gloss retention: min. 50%.
Erosion: >10% film loss.
6) Color: as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full line.
END OF SECTION 099100
PAINTING
099100 - 10
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
SECTION 101400-SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
1.03
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
RELATED SECTIONS
Division 09 ‘Painting’.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
1.04
Dimensional characters (letters and numbers).
Signage accessories.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for each type of sign.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other
components. Show mounting methods, grounds, mounting heights, layout, spacing, reinforcement,
accessories, and installation details.
1.
Provide message list for each sign, including large-scale details of wording, lettering, and braille
layout.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign material indicated that involves color selection.
D.
Samples for Verification: For each type of sign, include the following Samples to verify color selected:
1.
2.
3.
E.
1.05
A.
Panel Signs: Full-size Samples of each type of sign required.
Dimensional Characters: Full-size Samples of each type of dimensional character (letter and
number) required. Show character style, material, finish, and method of attachment.
Casting: Show representative texture, character style, spacing, finish, and method of attachment.
Maintenance Data:
manuals.
For signage cleaning and maintenance requirements to include in maintenance
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by signage manufacturer.
SIGNAGE
101400 - 1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each sign type through one source from a single manufacturer.
C.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and with code
provisions as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
D.
1.06
A.
1.07
A.
Interior Code Signage: Provide signage as required by accessibility regulations and requirements
of authorities having jurisdiction. These include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Illuminated Exit Signs: Refer to Division 26.
b.
Required signs at spaces typical within jurisdiction for the Project.
c.
Signs as scheduled on the drawings.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Field Measurements: Where sizes of signs are determined by dimensions of surfaces on which they are
installed, verify dimensions by field measurement before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
COORDINATION
For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, advise installers of anchorage devices
about specific requirements for placement of anchorage devices and similar items to be used for attaching
signs.
1.
For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, furnish templates for installation of
anchorage devices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
MANUFACTURERS
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product
selection:
1.
2.
3.
2.02
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers
specified.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers
specified.
Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each sign is based on the product named. Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one
of the other manufacturers specified.
PANEL SIGNS
General: Provide panel signs that comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes,
colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction.
SIGNAGE
101400 - 2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
1.
B.
Produce smooth panel sign surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within
tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) measured diagonally.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
C.
03/01/2010
Allenite Signs; Allen Marking Products, Inc.
American Graphics Inc.
Andco Industries Corp.
APCO Graphics, Inc.
ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
Best Manufacturing Co.
Grimco, Inc.
Innerface Sign Systems, Inc.
Kaltech Industries Group, Inc.
Mills Manufacturing, Inc.
Mohawk Sign Systems.
Seton Identification Products.
Signature Signs, Inc.
Supersine Company (The).
U.S. Stamp & Sign (Wall mounted signs).
Cast-Acrylic Sheet: Manufacturer's standard and as follows:
1.
Color: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range.
D.
Brackets: Fabricate brackets and fittings for bracket-mounted signs from extruded aluminum to suit
panel sign construction and mounting conditions indicated. Factory-paint brackets in color matching
background color of panel sign.
E.
Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with requirements indicated on Drawings for
size, style, spacing, content, mounting height and location, material, finishes, and colors of signage.
F.
Tactile and Braille Copy: Manufacturer's standard process for producing copy complying with ADA
Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 braille. Produce
precisely formed characters with square cut edges free from burrs and cut marks.
1.
2.
G.
2.03
A.
Panel Material: Opaque acrylic sheet, Photopolymer.
Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For colors, provide Pantone Matching System (PMS) colored
coatings, including inks and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum
adherence to acrylic surface and are nonfading for application intended.
DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
American Graphics Inc.
A.R.K. Ramos.
ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
Charleston Industries, Inc.
Gemini Incorporated.
Grimco, Inc.
Innerface Sign Systems, Inc.
SIGNAGE
101400 - 3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
B.
Kaltech Industries Group, Inc.
Metal Arts; Div. of L&H Mfg.
Mills Manufacturing, Inc.
Mohawk Sign Systems.
Signature Sign Signs, Inc.
Southwell Co. (The).
Exterior Character Sign Schedule:
1.
2.04
03/01/2010
Electrical Room.
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
B.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if
they are within one-half of range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not
acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B.
Verify that items, including blocking, anchor inserts, and electrical power provided under other sections
of Work are sized and located to accommodate signs.
C.
Examine supporting members to ensure that surfaces are at elevations indicated or required to comply
with authorities having jurisdiction and are free from dirt and other deleterious matter.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
A.
INSTALLATION
General: Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and
in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion and
other defects in appearance.
Exterior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where
not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to
allow approach within 3 inches (75 mm) of sign without encountering protruding objects or
standing within swing of door. Provide a silicone construction sealant in addition to the
manufacturer’s adhesive at the rear face of sign before applying to wall surface.
SIGNAGE
101400 - 4
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
B.
Bracket-Mounted Units: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets, fittings, and hardware as appropriate
for mounting signs that project at right angles from walls and ceilings. Attach brackets and fittings
securely to walls and ceilings with concealed fasteners and anchoring devices to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods recommended in writing by
manufacturer for character form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure
indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish character spacing and to locate holes for fasteners.
1.
3.03
A.
Flush Mounting: Mount characters with backs in contact with wall surface.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect
signs from damage until acceptance by Owner.
END OF SECTION 101400
SIGNAGE
101400 - 5
This page left intentionally blank
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
03/01/2010
SECTION 102600
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.03
Corner guards.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for surface-mounted wall
guards, corner guards, and handrails.
Division 4 Section “Concrete Unit Masonry.”
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include physical characteristics, such as durability, resistance to fading, and flame
resistance, for each impact-resistant wall protection system component indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show locations, extent, and installation details of each impact-resistant wall protection
system component. Show methods of attachment to adjoining construction.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of sections of vinyl plastic material
showing the full range of colors and textures available for each impact-resistant wall protection system
component indicated.
D.
Samples for Verification: For the following products, showing the full range of color and texture
variations expected in each impact-resistant wall protection system component. Prepare Samples from
the same material to be used for the Work.
1.
Wall and Corner Guards: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples of each type of impact-resistant wall
protection system component required. Include examples of joinery, corners, and field splices.
E.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating compliance of each impact-resistant
wall protection system component with requirements indicated, based on tests performed by testing
agency within the past five years.
F.
Maintenance Data: For each impact-resistant wall protection system component to include in
maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
102600 - 1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
1.
1.04
03/01/2010
Include recommended methods and frequency for maintaining optimum condition of vinyl plastic
covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against using cleaning
materials and methods that may be detrimental to vinyl plastic finishes and performance.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed installation of impact-resistant wall
protection system components similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and
whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing impact-resistant wall protection
system components similar to those required for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain each color, grade, finish, and type of impact-resistant wall protection system
component from a single source with resources to provide components of consistent quality in appearance
and physical properties.
D.
Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems
aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions,
arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one
another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to
verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, or in-service
performance.
E.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of impact-resistant wall
protection system and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers systems with
equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitution
Procedures."
1.
F.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant wall protection system components with the
following surface-burning characteristics, as determined by testing materials identical to those required in
this Section per ASTM E 84 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Identify impact-resistant wall protection system components with appropriate markings of
applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1.
2.
G.
1.05
A.
Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architects
approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for
review.
Flame Spread: 25 or less.
Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
Impact Strength: Provide impact-resistant wall protection system components with a minimum impact
resistance of 25.4 ft-lbf/in. (1356 J/m) of width when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Store wall surface-protection materials in original undamaged packages and containers inside a wellventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
102600 - 2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
1.
2.
1.06
A.
1.07
A.
03/01/2010
Maintain room temperature within the storage area at not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) during the
period plastic materials are stored. Keep sheet material out of direct sunlight to avoid surface
distortion.
Store rigid plastic corner-guard covers in a vertical position, and rigid plastic wall guard and
handrail covers in a horizontal position for a minimum of 72 hours, or until the plastic material
attains the minimum room temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C).
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall surface-protection system components until the space is
enclosed and weatherproof and ambient temperature within the building is maintained at not less than 70
deg F (21 deg C) for not less than 72 hours before beginning installation. Do not install rigid plastic wall
surface-protection systems until that temperature has been attained and is stabilized.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that
are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Impact-Resistant Wall Protection System Units: Full-size units of maximum length, including
vinyl plastic cover and aluminum retainer, equal to 2 percent of each type, color, and texture of
each type of unit installed, but not less than two units.
a.
Include accessory components as required. Replacement materials shall be from the same
production run as materials installed. Package replacement materials with protective
covering, identified with appropriate labels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering impactresistant wall protection system products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide impact-resistant wall protection
system products by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.02
Balco, Inc.
Construction Specialties, Inc.
IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, Inc.
Koroseal Wall Protection Systems, Inc.
Pawling Corporation.
Wilkinson Company, Inc.
MATERIALS
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
102600 - 3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
A.
Extruded Rigid Plastic: Textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant, PVC or acrylicmodified vinyl plastic; thickness as indicated; with a minimum impact resistance of 25.4 ft-lbf/in. (1356
J/m) of width when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A.
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.03
A.
03/01/2010
Color and Texture: Match Architect's samples.
Color and Texture: As indicated by referencing manufacturer's designations.
Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for these
characteristics.
Stainless Steel: 316 Type, satin finish.
CORNER GUARDS
Surface-Mounted, Plastic and Stainless Steel Corner Guards: Embossed, resilient plastic PVC or acrylicmodified vinyl sheet corner guards; stainless steel as indicated. Provide 90-degree turn, unless otherwise
indicated; and formed edges. Pawling CG-12 Cornerguard (basis of design for Plastic).
1.
2.
3.
Wing Size: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (63.5 by 63.5 mm) x 1/8” radius.
Length: 48”.
Mounting Method: Countersunk screws with mounting holes 0.10 inch (2.5 mm) o.c.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine areas and conditions in which impact-resistant wall protection system components and impactresistant wall covering materials will be installed.
1.
Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall
protection system components.
B.
Impact-Resistant Wall Covering Materials: Wall surfaces to receive impact-resistant wall covering
materials shall be dry and free from dirt, grease, loose paint, and scale.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
A.
3.03
A.
PREPARATION
General: Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.
INSTALLATION
Install impact-resistant wall protection system components level, plumb, and true to line without
distortions.
1.
Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the
finished Work.
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
102600 - 4
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
B.
Install aluminum retainers, mounting brackets, and other accessories according to the manufacturer's
written instructions.
1.
3.04
03/01/2010
Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet (6.1 m), splice aluminum retainers and
plastic covers at different locations along the run.
CLEANING
A.
General: Immediately on completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard
ammonia-based household cleaning agent. Clean metal components according to the manufacturer's
written instructions.
B.
Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended by the manufacturer.
C.
Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris, resulting from installation, on completion of work and
leave installation areas in neat, clean condition.
END OF SECTION 102600
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
102600 - 5
This page left intentionally blank
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/10
SECTION 260500
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
The electrical work included in all other divisions are the responsibility of the contractor performing
the Division 26 work unless noted otherwise.
1.2
PROJECT OVERVIEW
A.
Provide power and lighting for the construction of a park building.
1.3
SCOPE
A.
The work under this section includes basic electrical requirements, which are applicable to all Division
26 sections. This section includes information common to two or more technical specification sections
or items that are of a general nature, not conveniently fitting into other technical sections. Included are
the following topics:
B.
Section Includes:
1.
GENERAL
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
Project Overview
Scope
Related Work
Reference Standards
Regulatory Requirements
Quality Assurance
Protection of Finished Surfaces
Approved Electrical Testing Laboratories
Sleeves for Raceways and Cables
Grout
Sealing
Owner Furnished Equipment
Work by Owner
Provisions for Future Work
Intent
Omissions
Submittals
Project/Site Conditions
Work Sequence and Scheduling
Work by Other Trades
Request and Certificate for Payment
Certificates and Inspections
Operating and Maintenance Data
Training of Owner Personnel
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION
260500 - 1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
y.
2.
Excavation and Backfill
Concrete Work
Cutting and Patching
Building Access
Equipment Access
Coordination
Sleeves: Installation for Electrical Penetrations
Sealing
Housekeeping and Clean Up
RELATED WORK
a.
5.
Access Panels and Doors
Identification
Sealing
EXECUTION
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
4.
Record Drawings
PRODUCTS
a.
b.
c.
3.
Applicable provisions of Division 1 govern work under this Section.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
a.
Abbreviations of standards organizations referenced in this and other sections are as
follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
6.
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories, Inc.
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IES
Illuminating Engineering Society
ISA
Instrument Society of America
NBS National Bureau of Standards
NEC National Electric Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NESC National Electrical Safety Code
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
a.
b.
7.
07/09/10
All work and materials are to conform in every detail to applicable rules and requirements
of the National Electrical Code (ANSI/NFPA 70), other applicable National Fire Protection
Association codes, the National Electrical Safety Code, and present manufacturing
standards (including NEMA).
All Division 26 work shall be done under the direction of a currently certified State of
Florida Certified Master Electrician.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION
260500 - 2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
a.
b.
c.
8.
Where equipment or accessories are used which differ in arrangement, configuration,
dimensions, ratings, or engineering parameters from those indicated on the contract
documents, the contractor is responsible for all costs involved in integrating the equipment
or accessories into the system and the assigned space and for obtaining the performance
from the system into which these items are placed.
Manufacturer references used herein are intended to establish a level of quality and
performance requirements unless more explicit restrictions are stated to apply.
All materials, except medium voltage equipment and components, shall be listed by and
shall bear the label of an approved electrical testing laboratory. If none of the approved
electrical testing laboratories has published standards for a particular item, then other
national independent testing standards, if available, applicable, and approved by DSF, shall
apply and such items shall bear those labels. Where one of the approved electrical testing
laboratories has an applicable system listing and label, the entire system, except for
medium voltage equipment and components, shall be so labeled.
CONTINUITY OF EXISTING SERVICES AND SYSTEMS
a.
b.
9.
No outages shall be permitted on existing systems except at the time and during the interval
specified by the Owner and Architect. This will require written approval. Any outage
must be scheduled when the interruption causes the least interference with normal
institutional schedules and business routines. No extra costs will be paid to the Contractor
for such outages which must occur outside of regular weekly working hours. If required by
the serving utility, include these costs in bid.
This Contractor shall restore any circuit interrupted as a result of this work to proper
operation as soon as possible.
PROTECTION OF FINISHED SURFACES
a.
10.
Furnish one can of touch-up paint for each different color factory finish furnished by the
Contractor. Deliver touch-up paint with other "loose and detachable parts" as covered in
the General Requirements.
APPROVED ELECTRICAL TESTING LABORATORIES
a.
The following laboratories are approved for providing electrical product safety testing and
listing services as required in these specifications:
1)
2)
1.4
07/09/10
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
Electrical Testing Laboratories, Inc.
SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES
A.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
B.
Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with
plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.
1.
Minimum Metal Thickness:
a.
For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more than 16
inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION
260500 - 3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
b.
1.5
07/09/10
For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and 1 or
more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.
GROUT
A.
Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate
grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30minute working time.
1.6
SEALING
1.
1.7
Sealing of sleeves/openings between conduits, cable trays, wireways, troughs, cablebus, busduct,
etc. and the structural or partition opening shall be the responsibility of the contractor whose work
penetrates the opening.
WORK BY OWNER
A.
Asbestos abatement and PCB equipment (other than light fixture ballasts) removal and disposal, if
required, will be by the Owner under separate contract.
B.
Electrical testing not described in these contract documents will be by the Owner under separate
contract.
1.8
INTENT
A.
The Contractor shall furnish and install all the necessary materials, apparatus, and devices to complete
the electrical equipment and systems installation herein specified, except such parts as are specifically
exempted herein.
B.
If an item is either called for in the specifications or shown on the plans, it shall be considered
sufficient for the inclusion of said item in this contract. If a conflict exists within the Specifications or
exists within the Drawings, the Contractor shall furnish the item, system, or workmanship, which is the
highest quality, largest, or most closely fits the Owners intent). Refer to the General Conditions of the
Contract for further clarification.
C.
It must be understood that the details and drawings are diagrammatic. The Contractor shall verify all
dimensions at the site and be responsible for their accuracy.
D.
All sizes as given are minimum except as noted.
E.
Materials and labor shall be new (unless noted or stated otherwise), first class, and workmanlike, and
shall be subject at all times to the Owner’s and Architect’s inspections, tests and approval from the
commencement until the acceptance of the completed work.
F.
Whenever a particular manufacturer's product is named, it is intended to establish a level of quality and
performance requirements unless more explicit restrictions are stated to apply.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION
260500 - 4
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
1.9
07/09/10
OMISSIONS
A.
No later than ten (10) days before bid opening, the Contractor shall call the attention of the Owner and
Architect to any materials or apparatus the Contractor believes to be inadequate and to any necessary
items of work omitted.
1.10
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit for all equipment and systems as indicated in the respective specification sections, marking
each submittal with that specification section number. Mark general catalog sheets and drawings to
indicate specific items being submitted and proper identification of equipment by name and/or number,
as indicated in the contract documents. Failure to do this may result in the submittal(s) being returned
to the Contractor for correction and resubmission. Failing to follow these instructions does not relieve
the Contractor from the requirement of meeting the project schedule.
B.
On request from the Architect, the successful bidder shall furnish additional drawings, illustrations,
catalog data, performance characteristics, etc.
C.
Submittals shall be grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, products, and
accessories in a single submittal. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.
Include wiring diagrams of electrically powered equipment.
D.
The submittals must be approved before fabrication is authorized.
E.
Submit sufficient quantities of submittals to allow the following distribution:
1.
2.
3.
1.11
Operating and Maintenance Manuals
Architect
Engineer
3 copies
2 copies
1 copy
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A.
Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions.
B.
Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including
changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission of Owner and Architect before
proceeding.
C.
Tools, materials and equipment shall be confined to areas designated by the Owner and Architect.
1.12
A.
1.13
A.
WORK SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING
Install work in phases to accommodate user Owner's occupancy requirements. During the construction
period coordinate electrical schedule and operations with the Owner and Architect.
WORK BY OTHER TRADES
Every attempt has been made to indicate in this trade's specifications and drawings all work required of
this Contractor. However, there may be additional specific paragraphs in other trade specifications and
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION
260500 - 5
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/10
addenda, and additional notes on drawings for other trades which pertain to this Trade's work, and thus
those additional requirements are hereby made a part of these specifications and drawings.
B.
Electrical details on drawings for equipment to be provided by others are based on preliminary design
data only. This Contractor shall lay out the electrical work and shall be responsible for its correctness
to match equipment actually provided by others.
1.14
REQUEST AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT
A.
Within 10 days after Notice to Proceed, the successful bidder will submit to the Owner and Architect
in a form prescribed below and by the General Conditions of the Contract, Scheduling and
Coordination of Work, Reports, Records and Data, and Payments to Contractor, a cost breakdown of
the proposed values for work performed which, if approved by the Owner, will become the basis for
construction progress and monthly payments. The cost breakdown items shall reflect actual work
progress stages as closely as feasible.
B.
In addition, if payment will be requested for approved off-site stored material, then that material shall
be listed as a line item and the Contractor may be compensated by the Owner.
1.15
SALVAGE MATERIALS
A.
No materials removed from this project shall be reused. All materials removed shall become the
property of and shall be disposed of by the Contractor.
1.16
CERTIFICATES AND INSPECTIONS
A.
Obtain and pay for all required installation inspections.
1.17
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Assemble material in three-ring or post binders, using an index at the front of each volume and tabs for
each system or type of equipment. In addition to the data indicated in the General Requirements,
include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.18
A.
Copies of all approved submittals.
Manufacturer’s wiring diagrams for electrically powered equipment.
Records of tests performed to certify compliance with system requirements.
Certificates of inspection by regulatory agencies.
Parts lists for manufactured equipment.
Preventative maintenance recommendations.
Warranties.
Additional information as indicated in the technical specification sections.
RECORD DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall maintain at least one copy each of the specifications and drawings on the job site
at all times.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION
260500 - 6
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/10
B.
The Owner will provide the Contractor with a suitable set of contract drawings on which daily records
of changes and deviations from contract shall be recorded. Dimensions and elevations on the record
drawings shall locate all buried or concealed piping, conduit, or similar items.
C.
The daily record of changes shall be the responsibility of Contractor's field superintendent. No
arbitrary mark-ups will be permitted.
D.
At completion of the project, the Contractor shall submit the marked-up record drawings to the Owner
and Architect prior to final payment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
IDENTIFICATION
A.
See Electrical section 260553 – Identification for Electrical Systems.
2.2
NON-RATED PENETRATIONS:
A.
Conduit Penetrations Through Below Grade Walls:
1.
B.
In exterior wall openings below grade, use a modular mechanical type seal consisting of
interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the
uninsulated conduit and the cored opening or a water-stop type wall sleeve.
Conduit and Cable Tray Penetrations:
1.
At conduit and cable tray penetrations of non-rated interior partitions, floors and exterior walls
above grade, use urethane caulk in annular space between conduit and sleeve, or the core drilled
opening.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A.
3.2
Perform all excavation and backfill work to accomplish indicated electrical systems installation.
Blasting will not be allowed.
CONCRETE WORK
A.
Confirm with the Construction Manager or General Contractor that the Division 3 Contractor will
perform all cast-in-place concrete unless noted otherwise elsewhere. Provide all layout drawings,
anchor bolts, metal shapes, and/or templates required to be cast into concrete or used to form concrete
for the support of electrical equipment.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION
260500 - 7
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
3.3
07/09/10
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
3.4
Refer to Division 1, General Requirements, Cutting and Patching.
BUILDING ACCESS
A.
3.5
Arrange for the necessary openings in the building to allow for admittance of all apparatus. When the
building access was not previously arranged and must be provided by this contractor, restore any
opening to its original condition after the apparatus has been brought into the building.
EQUIPMENT ACCESS
A.
3.6
Install all piping, conduit, ductwork, and accessories to permit access to equipment for maintenance.
Coordinate the exact location of wall and ceiling access panels and doors with the General Contractor,
making sure that access is available for all equipment and specialties. Where access is required in
plaster or drywall walls or ceilings, furnish the access doors to the General Contractor and reimburse
the General Contractor for installation of those access doors.
COORDINATION
A.
The Contractor shall cooperate with other trades in locating work in a proper manner. Should it be
necessary to raise or lower or move longitudinally any part of the electrical work to better fit the
general installation, such work shall be done at no extra cost to the Owner, provided such decision is
reached prior to actual installation. The Contractor shall check location of electrical outlets with
respect to other installations before installing.
B.
The Contractor shall verify that all devices are compatible for the surfaces on which they will be used.
This includes, but is not limited to light fixtures, panelboards, devices, etc. and recessed or semirecessed units installed in/on architectural surfaces.
C.
Coordinate all work with other contractors prior to installation. Any installed work that is not
coordinated and that interferes with other contractor's work shall be removed or relocated at the
installing contractor's expense.
D.
Verify system completion to the testing consultant. Demonstrate the starting, interlocking and control
features of each system so the testing contractor can perform its work.
E.
Comply with NECA 1.
F.
Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for
wall-mounting items.
G.
Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and
install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these
requirements.
H.
Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both
electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future
disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION
260500 - 8
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
I.
07/09/10
Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.7
SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATION
A.
Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate
concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
B.
Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings
are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C.
Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D.
Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless
openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.
E.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
F.
Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
G.
Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or
cable, unless indicated otherwise.
H.
Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry
1.
Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces
smooth; protect grout while curing.
I.
Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and
raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with
requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants.".
J.
Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type
flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
K.
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for
installing mechanical sleeve seals.
L.
Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
M.
Pipe sleeves for conduits 6" in diameter and smaller, in new poured concrete construction, shall be
schedule 40 steel pipe, plastic removable sleeve or sheet metal sleeve, all cast in place.
N.
In wet area floor penetrations, top of sleeve to be 2 inches above the adjacent floor. In existing wet
area floor penetrations, core drill sleeve openings large enough to insert schedule 40 sleeve and grout
the area around the sleeve. If a pipe clamp resting on the sleeve supports the pipe penetrating the
sleeve, weld a collar or struts to the sleeve that will transfer weight to the existing floor structure. Wet
areas for this paragraph are rooms or spaces containing air handling unit coils, converters, pumps,
chillers, boilers, and similar waterside equipment.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION
260500 - 9
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
O.
07/09/10
Pipe penetrations in existing concrete floors that are not in wet areas may omit the use of schedule 40
sleeve and use the core drilled opening as the sleeve.
3.8
SEALING
A.
Non-Rated Surfaces:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.9
When the opening is through a non-fire rated wall, floor, ceiling or roof the opening must be
sealed using an approved type of material.
Use galvanized sheet metal sleeves in hollow wall penetrations to provide a backing for the
sealant. Grout area around sleeve in masonry construction.
Install escutcheons or floor/ceiling plates where conduit, penetrates non-fire rated surfaces in
occupied spaces. Occupied spaces for this paragraph include only those rooms with finished
ceilings and the penetration occurs below the ceiling.
In exterior wall openings below grade, assemble rubber links of mechanical seal to the proper size
for the conduit and tighten in place, in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Install so
that the bolts used to tighten the seal are accessible from the interior of the building or vault.
At interior partitions, conduit penetrations are required to be sealed for all clean rooms,
laboratories, and most hospital spaces, computer rooms, dormitory rooms, tele/data/com rooms
and similar spaces where the room pressure or odor transmission must be controlled. Apply
sealant to both sides of the penetration in such a manner that the annular space between the
conduit sleeve and the conduit is completely filled.
HOUSEKEEPING AND CLEAN UP
A.
The Contractor shall clean up and remove from the premises, on a daily basis, all debris and rubbish
resulting from its work and shall repair all damage to new and existing equipment resulting from its
work. When job is complete, this Contractor shall remove all tools, excess material and equipment,
etc., from the site.
END OF SECTION
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION
260500 - 10
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/10
SECTION 260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Field quality-control test reports.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
B.
Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
1.4
RECEIVING, STORING AND PROTECTING
A.
Receive, store, and protect, and handle products according to NECA 1 Standard Practices for Good
Workmanship in Electrical Construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUCTORS
A.
Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable
Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Bare Copper Conductors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.
Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches
wide and 1/16 inch thick.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
7.
2.2
07/09/10
Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper
ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A.
Provide NRTL-listed THHN/THWN insulated copper wire.
B.
Use solid grounding conductors 10 AWG and smaller where not subject to vibration or repeated flexing.
C.
Use stranded grounding conductors for 8 AWG and larger.
D.
Use stranded grounding conductors where subject to vibration or repeated flexing.
grounding conductors in flexible conduit at motor connections.
E.
Color code grounding conductors as follows:
1.
Equipment ground:
a.
b.
2.3
Use stranded
Conductors 6 AWG and smaller: Green colored insulation.
Conductors 4 AWG and larger: Green colored insulation or black colored insulation with
3/4 inch wide band of water and oil-resistant green plastic adhesive tape.
CONNECTORS
A.
Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors
and other items connected.
B.
Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least
two bolts.
1.
C.
Exothermic Weld Grounding Connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Provide molds and welding material for making exothermic weld connections.
In interior locations and in vaults, use low smoke emission type welding material.
Match mold and weld material to material types, shapes and sizes to be joined.
Manufacturer: ERICO Cadweld
Compression Grounding Connections:
1.
2.
2.4
Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
Use two-hole heavy-duty compression lugs for bolted connections to ground bars, ground plates,
and equipment ground pads.
Manufacturer: Burndy “Hyground”.
GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A.
Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel, 3/4 inch by 10 feet (19 mm by 3 m) in diameter.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATIONS
A.
Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for
No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum. Bury at
least 24 inches below grade.
C.
Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.2
Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated.
Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A.
Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required
by NFPA 70:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.3
Feeders and branch circuits.
Lighting circuits.
Receptacle circuits.
Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
Flexible raceway runs.
Armored and metal-clad cable runs.
INSTALLATION
A.
Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or
required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain,
impact, or damage.
B.
Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
C.
Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise
indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if any.
For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each
other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the
service grounding electrode conductor.
Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole and shall be at least 12 inches
deep, with cover.
1.
Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service, unless otherwise indicated. Install at the
ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or
floor.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
D.
Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except
where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1.
2.
3.
E.
2.
Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from
building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to
building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp
connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the
flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street
side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters.
Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
Bonding Bushings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.4
Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any
adjacent parts.
Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration
is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is
required, use a bolted clamp.
Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1.
F.
07/09/10
Install bonding bushings on metallic conduit containing circuits rated 100 amperes and higher.
Install bonding bushings on metallic conduits entering enclosures through concentric, eccentric or
oversize knockouts.
Install bonding bushings on metallic conduits that terminate to a metallic enclosure without
effective electrical connection such as locknuts or threaded bushings.
Bond conduit bonding bushing lug to the equipment ground bar or ground lug in switchgear,
panelboards, transformers, motor control centers, starters, disconnect switches, cabinets, etc. Size
bonding jumpers in accordance with the NEC.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Attach grounds permanently before permanent building service is energized.
B.
Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized,
test for compliance with requirements.
Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is
specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells.
a.
b.
C.
Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and
without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and
without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.
Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
1.
2.
3.
Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.
Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.
Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 4
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
4.
D.
07/09/10
Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 ohm(s).
Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly
and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
END OF SECTION
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 5
This page left intentionally blank
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/10
SECTION 260529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
Construction requirements for concrete bases.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis
by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B.
Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and
its contents.
C.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment
and connected systems and components.
D.
Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or
imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.
E.
Do not drill or otherwise compromise structural members.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For steel slotted support systems.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:
1.
C.
1.4
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing details of fabricated hangers, and supports.
Provide detail drawings along with catalog cuts, templates, and erection and installation details, as
appropriate. Submittals shall be complete in detail; shall indicate thickness, type, grade, class of
metal, and dimensions; and shall show construction details, reinforcement, anchorage, and
installation with relation to the building construction.
Welding certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code Steel."
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
B.
07/09/10
Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A.
Steel Slotted Support Systems:
assembly.
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
ERICO International Corporation.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied
according to MFMA-4.
Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.
Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B.
Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
C.
Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types
and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
D.
Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body
and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits.
Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual
conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
E.
Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and
bars; black and galvanized.
F.
Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports
to building surfaces include the following:
1.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete,
steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials where used.
a.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Hilti Inc.
ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
MKT Fastening, LLC.
Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
2.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened
portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported
loads and building materials in which used.
a.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1)
2)
3)
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.2
07/09/10
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
Hilti Inc.
ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18;
complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached
structural element.
Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A.
Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of
supported equipment.
B.
Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and
plates.
2.3
COATINGS
A.
Provide products for use indoors protected with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion
resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic.
B.
Provide products for use outdoors or in damp or corrosive indoor locations with hot-dip galvanized
coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish,
or inherent material characteristic.
2.4
RACEWAY SUPPORTING DEVICES
A.
Provide supports as described below for the installation of raceway systems.
B.
Use pressed steel, single bolt hangers to support individual RGS, IMC or EMT conduit runs from
threaded rods or beam clamps. Manufacturer: Steel City “6H Series”.
C.
For individual runs of EMT up to 1-inch trade size above accessible ceilings, use spring steel conduit
clips with positive snap closure. Manufacturer: ERICO CADDY “M Series”.
D.
Use malleable iron conduit clamps to secure individual RGS, IMC or EMT conduit runs across, parallel,
or perpendicular to beams, channels and angle supports. Manufacturer: Steel City “RC, EC, and PC
Series”.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/10
E.
Use two-piece carbon steel riser clamps for individual vertical conduits passing through floors.
Manufacturer: Kindorf “C-210 Series”.
F.
Use snap-on type one-hole steel straps to secure individual conduits up to 2-inch trade size to flat, dry
interior surfaces. Manufacturer: T&B “1210 Series” for RGS and IMC and “4100 Series” for EMT.
G.
Use one-hole malleable iron straps to secure individual conduits up to 4-inch trade size to flat, dry interior
surfaces. Manufacturer: T&B “1275 Series”.
H.
Use one-hole malleable iron straps and conduit spacers to secure individual conduits to flat exterior or
damp flat interior surfaces. Manufacturer: T&B “1275 Series” straps with 1350 Series” spacers.
I.
Support multiple parallel horizontal conduits with trapeze hangers fabricated from framing channel
materials specified below.
2.5
OUTLET BOX SUPPORTING DEVICES
A.
Provide pre-fabricated sheet steel brackets to support outlet boxes from metal studs in dry-wall
construction.
B.
Provide brackets for single-outlet boxes that are inset to allow for dry-wall ring and have a far-side
support leg. Manufacturer: ERICO CADDY “H Series”.
C.
Provide brackets for multiple outlet boxes that are inset to allow for dry-wall rings and span from stud to
stud. Manufacturer: ERICO CADDY “RBS Series”.
2.6
FASTENERS
A.
Provide fasteners of the types, materials, and construction features as follows:
1.
Pre-set concrete inserts:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Continuous inserts: Design load 2000 lbs per ft of insert length with safety factor of five (5)
in 3000 psi concrete. Manufacturer: B-Line “B221”
Spot inserts: NRTL-listed with design load of 1000 lb. Manufacturer: B-Line “B2506”
Metal deck bolts: Adjustable with bolt sizes from 3/8 inch to 3/4 inch. Manufacturer: BLine “B3019”
Expansion anchors: NRTL listed carbon steel wedge type studs. Manufacturer: Hilti “Kwik Bolt
III”. Note restrictions on use of expansion bolts in Part 3 of this Section.
Toggle bolts: All steel-spring head type.
Masonry screw anchors: Case hardened steel. Manufacturer: Hilti “Kwik-Con II”.
Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel, designed for the intended service. Note
restrictions on use of powder-driven fasteners in Part 3 of this Section.
Beam clamps: NRTL-listed, or compliant with Federal Specification WW-H-171E, or compliant
with Manufacturers’ Standardization Society SP-69 and SP-58.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 4
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
2.7
07/09/10
FRAMING CHANNEL SYSTEMS
A.
Provide U-channel framing systems that conform to the Metal Framing Manufacturers’ Association
standards publication MFMA-4 and are fabricated using minimum 12-gage steel, with 9/16-inch-diameter
holes, from 1-1/2 to 1-7/8 inches on center, in the surface opposite the “U” opening.
B.
Provide fittings and accessories that mate and match with U-channel and are of the same manufacturer.
Use two-piece, single bolt type conduit straps on U-channel supports.
C.
Manufacturers: Unistrut, B-Line, Superstrut.
2.8
FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES
A.
Provide shop- or field-fabricated supports or manufactured supports assembled from U-channel
components.
B.
Provide steel brackets fabricated from angles, channels, and other standard structural shapes. Connect
with welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports.
2.9
SLEEVES AND SEALS
A.
Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:
1.
Sheet Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snap-lock joint,
welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate sleeves from the following gage metal
for sleeve diameter noted:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
3-inch and smaller: 20-gage.
4-inch to 6-inch: 16-gage.
over 6-inch: 14-gage.
Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe two pipe sizes larger than the
penetrating raceway.
Plastic Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe two pipe sizes larger than the
penetrating raceway.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Locate each item of rigid electrical equipment entirely on one side only of a building expansion joint.
B.
Piping, cable trays, etc., which cross an expansion joint to rigid electrical equipment, shall have flexible
joints that are capable of accommodating calculated thermal displacements.
C.
Conform to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for selection and installation of hangers,
and supports.
D.
Do not use wire or perforated strap for permanent electrical supports.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 5
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/10
E.
Attach each item of electrical equipment as shown.
F.
Provide and install electrical conduit, busways, cable trays, etc. which cross an expansion joint to rigid
electrical equipment, with flexible joints as shown.
G.
Do not support conduits, busways, cable trays, etc. from ceiling suspension wires.
3.2
APPLICATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment
and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B.
Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT,
IMC, and RMC as stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
C.
Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system,
sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load
limits.
1.
2.
3.
D.
3.3
Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction
action for retention in support channel.
Support three or more parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze hangers.
Do not support conduits from ceiling suspension wires.
Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and
smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for
fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.
B.
Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be
supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C.
Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be
adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design
load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.
D.
Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical
items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise
indicated by code:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers
and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use
for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 6
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
6.
7.
8.
E.
3.4
07/09/10
To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.
To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and
other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.
Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.
INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A.
Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated
metal supports.
B.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to
support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.5
PAINTING
A.
Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after
erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1
requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum
dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B.
Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds,
bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.
C.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair
paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 7
This page left intentionally blank
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/10
SECTION 260533
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Conduits and fittings
B.
Outlet boxes
C.
Pull and junction boxes
D.
Surface metal raceways
E.
Wireway
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and
cabinets.
B.
Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.4
RECEIVING, STORING, AND PROTECTING
A.
Receive, store, and protect, and handle products according to NECA 1 – Standard Practices for Good
Workmanship in Electrical Construction.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 1
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
COATINGS
A.
2.2
Provide products with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved
alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic that is suitable for the environment in
which the product will be installed and used.
INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS (IMC)
A.
Furnish intermediate metal conduit (IMC) that meets the requirements of UL1242 – Intermediate Metal
Conduit, ANSI C80.6 – Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit (EIMC).
B.
Furnish zinc-plated, threaded, malleable iron fittings and conduit bodies that meet the requirements of
UL514B – Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes, and ANSI/NEMA FB1 – Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes,
and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
2.3
RIGID METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS (RMC)
A.
Furnish rigid metal conduit (RMC) that meets the requirements of UL6 – Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit,
NEMA C80.1 – Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC).
B.
Furnish zinc-plated, threaded, malleable iron fittings and conduit bodies that meet the requirements of
UL514B and ANSI/NEMA FB1.
2.4
PLASTIC-COATED STEEL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A.
Furnish PVC exterior coated, urethane interior coated, RMC or IMC that meets the requirements of
NEMA RN 1 – PVC Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit.
B.
Use factory-fabricated elbows.
C.
Furnish 40 mil PVC exterior coated, urethane interior coated, zinc-plated, threaded, malleable iron
fittings and conduit bodies meeting the requirements of UL514B – Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes
and NEMA RN 1 PVC.
2.5
RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS (RNC)
A.
Furnish rigid non-metallic conduit (RNC) that meets the requirements of UL651 – Schedule 40 and 80
Rigid PVC Conduit, NEMA TC 2 – Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit.
B.
Furnish non-metallic, solvent-welded socket fittings that meet the requirements of UL514C – NonMetallic Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes, and NEMA TC 3 – PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC
Conduit and Tubing.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 2
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
2.6
07/09/10
ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING AND FITTINGS (EMT)
A.
Furnish galvanized electrical metallic tubing (EMT) that meets the requirements of UL797 – Electrical
Metallic Tubing, NEMA C80.3 – Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT).
B.
Furnish compression or set-screw type fittings that meet the requirements of UL514B – Fittings for
Conduit and Outlet Boxes, and ANSI/NEMA FB1 – Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for
Conduit and Cable Assemblies. Furnish insulated throat connectors.
2.7
FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A.
Furnish galvanized steel flexible metal conduit that meets the requirements of UL1 – Flexible Metal
Electrical Conduit.
B.
Furnish zinc-plated malleable iron fittings that meet the requirements of UL514B – Fittings for Conduit
and Outlet Boxes, and ANSI/NEMA FB1 – Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit
and Cable Assemblies. Furnish insulated throat connectors.
2.8
LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A.
Furnish liquid-tight flexible metal conduit that meets the requirements of UL360 – Liquid-Tight Flexible
Steel Conduit, Electrical.
B.
Furnish zinc-plated malleable iron or zinc-plated steel liquid-tight fittings that meet the requirements of
UL514B – Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes, and ANSI/NEMA FB1 – Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes,
and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. Furnish insulated throat connectors.
2.9
INSULATING BUSHINGS
A.
Provide NRTL listed insulating bushings with 105 ºC rated insulation.
B.
Manufacturer: O-Z/Gedney, Type IB.
2.10
GROUNDING BUSHINGS
A.
Provide NRTL listed, galvanized malleable iron, 150ºC rated insulated throat grounding bushings with
lay-in type ground cable lugs.
B.
Manufacturer: O-Z/Gedney, Type BLG.
2.11
EXPANSION FITTINGS
A.
Furnish NRTL listed expansion fittings with hot dipped galvanized malleable iron body, factory installed
packing and a bonding jumper.
B.
Manufacturer: O-Z/Gedney, Type AX, TX or EXE with Type BJ bonding jumper.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 3
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
2.12
07/09/10
CORROSION PROTECTION TAPE
A.
Furnish pressure-sensitive, 10 mil thick. PVC based tape for corrosion protection of metal conduit and
fittings.
B.
Manufacturer: 3M, Type 50.
2.13
RACEWAY MEASURING TAPE
A.
Furnish raceway measuring tape with permanently printed measurements in one-foot increments and
minimum 1200 lb average breaking strength.
B.
Manufacturer: Greenlee “39243”.
2.14
SURFACE METAL RACEWAY
A.
Furnish surface metal raceway that meets the requirements of UL5 – Surface Metal Electrical Raceways
and Fittings.
B.
Furnish surface metal raceway fabricated from cold rolled galvanized steel with a thickness of not less
than 0.040 inches and coated with a baked enamel finish.
C.
Furnish fittings required for a complete installation.
D.
Manufacturer: Wiremold “500” or “700” series.
2.15
OUTLET BOXES
A.
Provide outlet boxes selected for specific installations using the guidance in NEMA OS 3, Selection and
Installation Guidelines for Electrical Outlet Boxes, and the requirements of this Section.
B.
For dry locations provide galvanized steel outlet boxes that comply with UL Standard 514-A – Metallic
Outlet Boxes and ANSI/NEMA OS1 – Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box
Supports.
1.
2.
3.
4.
For luminaire outlets use 4 inch x 1-1/2 inch deep octagonal boxes with fixture stud attachment as
required to support luminaires.
For flush outlets in stud walls or above-grade cast-in-place concrete walls use 4 inch square x 11/2 inch deep boxes; provide deeper boxes or multiple gang boxes as required to fit devices.
Provide raised device covers that match the thickness of the wallboard and the number of devices.
Provide supplemental box supports to prevent movement of the box.
For flush outlets in above-grade masonry walls use masonry boxes with conduit knockouts.
Provide boxes with depth suitable for the masonry unit size. Provide multiple gang boxes as
required by the number of devices.
For surface outlet boxes in EMT raceway systems, use 4 inch x 2-1/8 inch deep square boxes.
Provide deeper boxes or multiple gang boxes as required to fit devices. Provide square surface
covers that match the installed device and have not less than two holes for securing the device to
the cover.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 4
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
C.
For damp or wet locations and for surface-mounted RMC or IMC raceway systems, provide outlet boxes
that comply with UL Standard 498 and 514, ANSI/NEMA FB1.
1.
2.
2.16
07/09/10
For lighting fixture outlets use 4 inch x 2-1/16 inch deep round cast malleable iron boxes with
threaded hubs.
For flush or surface wall-mounted outlets, use 4-11/16 square, 2-11/16 inch deep cast malleable
iron boxes with threaded hubs. Provide multiple gang boxes as required to fit devices. Provide
gasketed cast malleable iron or cast copper-free aluminum covers that match the installed device
and have not less than two holes for securing the device to the cover.
PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A.
For dry locations in clean, non-contamination environments use galvanized sheet steel pull and junction
boxes that comply with UL Standard 50 Type 1 and the NEC as to size and construction. Use boxes not
less than 4 inches square x 1-1/2 inches deep with screw-secured covers. Provide larger boxes as required
by the number and size of conduits and conductors.
B.
For dry locations in dusty or possible contamination (e.g. beryllium, explosives, or uranium)
environments use galvanized steel pull and junction boxes that comply with UL Standard 50 Type 12 and
the NEC as to size and construction. Use boxes not less than 6 inches square x 4 inches deep with
gasketed covers. Provide larger boxes as required by the number and size of conduits and conductors.
C.
For damp or wet, non-corrosive locations, in conduit runs up to 3/4 inch trade size, provide 4-11/16
inches square, 2-11/16 inches deep cast malleable iron pull and junction boxes with threaded hubs and
gasketed cast malleable iron or cast copper-free aluminum covers.
D.
For damp or wet, non-corrosive locations, in conduit runs 1 inch trade size and larger, provide galvanized
sheet-steel pull and junction boxes and covers that comply with UL 50 Type 3R.
E.
For damp or wet, non-corrosive locations that are subject to hose-directed water, provide pull and
junction boxes and covers that comply with UL 50 Type 4.
F.
For damp or wet, corrosive locations provide pull and junction boxes and covers that comply with UL 50
Type 4X.
G.
For locations subject to occasional submersion provide pull and junction boxes and covers that comply
with UL 50 Type 6.
H.
Provide connection points for equipment grounding conductors in each box.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Install complete systems of raceways and boxes for wiring systems.
B.
Install raceways and boxes according to NECA 1 Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical
Construction, NECA 101 Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT), NECA 111 Standard
for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC, ENT, LFNC), the NEC, the manufacturer’s instructions, and
requirements in this Section.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 5
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/10
C.
Raceway termination points and box locations shown on the Drawings are in approximate locations
unless dimensioned. Verify locations before rough-in.
D.
Raceway routing is shown on the Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Coordinate
routing with structure and with work of other trades. Route as required for a complete wiring system.
E.
Ground and bond raceways and boxes as required in Section 260526 Grounding and Bonding for
Electrical Systems.
F.
Support raceways and boxes in accordance with the requirements of Section 260529 Hangers and
Supports for Electrical Systems and the NEC.
G.
Identify raceways and boxes as required in Section 260553, Identification for Electrical Systems.
H.
Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
I.
Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes or raceways.
3.2
CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A.
For low-voltage wiring systems (less than 600 volts) use conduit materials according to the NEC and the
following:
1.
Outdoors - underground:
2.
Direct buried: Use RNC, plastic-coated RMC, tape-wrapped RMC, or tape-wrapped IMC. Do not
use RNC where subject to physical damage. Install with 24 inches minimum cover from top of
conduit to finished grade or top of paving.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Outdoors - exposed: Use RMC or IMC.
Outdoor corrosive locations (including cooling towers): Use plastic-coated RMC and fittings.
Outdoors - concealed: Use RMC or IMC for concealed outdoor work. Do not use bare RMC or
IMC in direct contact with earth. EMT may be used for concealed outdoor work where not in
contact with earth, not encased in concrete, and where not exposed to deteriorating agents.
Indoors – exposed outside of designated electrical rooms or telecommunications rooms:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
7.
Concrete encased: Use RNC, plastic-coated RMC, RMC, or IMC for concrete encased
underground work. Install with 24 inches minimum cover from top of encasement to
finished grade or paving.
Located less than 8 ft above the floor: Use RMC or IMC.
Exposed to severe physical damage: Use RMC or IMC.
Exposed to moisture: Use RMC or IMC.
Exposed to corrosives: Use plastic-coated RMC and fittings.
Located more than 8 ft above the floor, not exposed to deteriorating agents, and not subject
to severe physical damage: Use RMC, IMC, or EMT.
Indoors – concealed:
a.
b.
c.
Within drywall partitions and above false ceilings: Use RMC, IMC, or EMT.
Within masonry or cast-in-place concrete walls or floors: Use RMC or IMC.
Direct-buried under building floor slabs on grade: Use RNC, plastic-coated RMC, tapewrapped RMC, or tape-wrapped IMC. Locate top of conduits not less than 12 inches below
the bottom of the concrete slab. Install warning tape approximately 6 inches above the
conduits; install multiple warning tapes above parallel conduit runs wider than 18 inches.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 6
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
d.
8.
Concrete encased under building floor slabs on grade: Use RNC, plastic-coated RMC,
RMC, or IMC. Locate top of concrete encasement not less than 12 inches below the bottom
of the concrete slab. Install warning tape approximately 6 inches above the concrete
encasement; install multiple warning tapes above concrete encasements wider than 24
inches.
Connection to vibrating equipment (including transformers and hydraulic, pneumatic, or electric
solenoid or motor-driven equipment) - Use a minimum of 18 inches; maximum length as
determined by the NEC:
a.
b.
c.
d.
9.
07/09/10
Outdoors: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
In mechanical rooms: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
Wet, damp, or corrosive indoor locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
Dry indoor locations: Use flexible metal conduit.
Connections to luminaires: Use 3/8 inch flexible metal conduit or metal-clad cable in 6 foot
maximum lengths for tap conductors to luminaires above suspended ceilings.
B.
Use 3/4-inch or larger conduit to enclose multiple conductors larger than 12 AWG.
C.
Conceal conduits, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, with finished walls, floors and ceilings.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, install concealed conduits with a minimum of bends in the
shortest practical distance considering the type of building construction and obstructions.
D.
Position parallel underground conduits with not less than 7-1/2 inches center-to-center separation.
E.
Install expansion fittings where embedded conduits cross building expansion joints.
F.
Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to boxes in damp and wet locations.
G.
Use sealing locknuts, hubs, or similar water-resistant fittings on conduits entering the top of switchgear,
switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards, cabinets, pull boxes, and similar enclosures that are
exposed in structures with automatic fire sprinkler systems.
H.
Install insulating bushings or connectors with an insulated throat to protect conductors or cables at
conduit terminations.
I.
Install conduits with the following limits of bends and distance between pull points:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
J.
50 ft with 3 equivalent 90 degree bends.
100 ft with 2 equivalent 90 degree bends.
150 ft with 1 equivalent 90 degree bend.
200 ft straight run with no bends.
Provide large sweep radius elbows for 90 degree elbows (minimum) unless otherwise noted.
Stub-Up Connections:
1.
2.
3.
Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment with an
adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs, and set flush with the finished floor or
equipment pad.
Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; flexible metal conduit may be used 6
inches above the floor.
Where equipment connections are not made under this Subcontract, install threaded insert plugs
set flush with the floor.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 7
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
K.
07/09/10
Install conduit sealing fittings according to the manufacturer's written instructions. Locate fittings at
suitable, approved, accessible locations and fill them with NRTL-listed conduit sealing compound. For
concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish
similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points and
elsewhere as indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Where conduits enter or leave NEC Class I hazardous locations.
Where conduits pass from warm locations to cold locations, such as the boundaries of refrigerated
spaces and air-conditioned spaces.
Where conduits go between areas where air pressure differential must be maintained.
Where conduits enter an enclosure protected by a clean agent total flooding fire suppression
system.
Where otherwise required by the NEC.
L.
Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduits dry
and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to
cure for 20 minutes, minimum.
M.
Install plastic-coated RMC and fittings according to the NEC and manufacturer's instructions. Use only
fittings approved for use with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing
conduits.
N.
Do not use RNC 90 degree elbows larger than 2 inch trade size; use plastic-coated RMC, tape-wrapped
RMC, or tape-wrapped IMC for 2-1/2 inch trade size and larger 90 degree elbows.
O.
Maintain the following minimum clearances between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding
104 degrees F (40 degrees C):
1.
2.
6” at perpendicular crossings.
12” between parallel runs.
P.
Avoid moisture traps in conduit system; provide junction boxes with drain fitting at low points in conduit
system.
Q.
Install corrosion protection tape on metal conduits and fittings in contact with soil using half-lapped
wrappings.
R.
Install grounding bushings at the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
At every entry to enclosures on metallic conduits containing circuits rated 100 amperes and
higher.
On metallic conduits entering enclosures through concentric, eccentric or oversize knockouts.
On metallic conduits that terminate to a metallic enclosure without effective electrical connection
such as locknuts or threaded bushings.
S.
Install conduit measuring tape in empty raceways. Leave not less than 12 inches of slack at each end of
the tape. Secure each end of tape.
T.
Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow
surface contours as much as possible.
1.
2.
Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports.
Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where elbows can be
installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 8
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
U.
Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight.
1.
Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.
V.
Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools.
W.
Terminations:
1.
2.
X.
3.3
Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter squarely and
install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside and one outside box.
Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so
end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so
coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed.
Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed
sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover
plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the
following points:
1.
2.
Y.
07/09/10
Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.
Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.
OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION
A.
Install outlet boxes with centers at the following heights unless noted otherwise on the Drawings:
1.
Receptacle, telephone and data outlets:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Common Areas (such as conference and break rooms): 18 inches above finished floor.
Offices and Workstations: 18 inches above finished floor.
Receptacle, telephone and data outlets at lab benches and counters -- center 44 inches maximum
above finished floor; coordinate locations to be above, or completely within, bench and counter
backsplashes.
Light switches: center 48 inches above finished floor and within 6 inches of door frame.
Thermostats: center 48 inches above finished floor.
Wall mounted emergency lights: 80 inches above finished floor or 12 inches below the ceiling;
whichever is lower.
B.
Coordinate outlet box locations with modular furniture and associated hangers.
C.
Where the Drawings show outlets as adjacent, align outlet boxes with each other and group them
symmetrically.
D.
Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 262726 Wiring Devices.
E.
Install a multi-gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional type
boxes.
F.
Install box with plaster ring for single or multiple device outlets.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 9
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
G.
Use flush mounted outlet boxes in finished areas.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Install flush outlet boxes and fittings in walls and ceilings so that front edge is flush with the
finished surface. Repair broken wall or ceiling surfaces so no gaps or open spaces exceed 1/8 inch
at the edge of boxes or fittings.
Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only.
Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
Do not install flush mounting boxes back-to-back in walls; install with minimum 6 inches
separation. Install with minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.
Secure flush mounting boxes to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for
surface finish thickness.
Install stamped steel bridges to fasten multiple flush mounting outlet boxes between studs.
Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
H.
Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
I.
Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.
J.
Support boxes independently of conduit.
K.
Install partitions in boxes as follows:
1.
2.
3.
L.
3.4
07/09/10
Between 277 volt devices.
Between 277 volt light switches devices and 120 volt devices.
Between either 120 volt or 277 volt devices and low voltage control switches.
Install a blank cover plate on each outlet box in which no device is installed.
PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION
A.
Install pull and junction boxes as shown on the Drawings and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling,
and compliance with regulatory requirements.
B.
Install indoor pull and junction boxes in accessible locations above accessible ceilings and in unfinished
spaces. Position boxes so covers can be removed. Place boxes to maintain headroom.
C.
Install a concrete collar around handholes not placed in sidewalks or pavement.
3.5
WIREWAY INSTALLATION
A.
Install wireways at locations indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Mount plumb and level.
3.6
SURFACE METAL RACEWAY INSTALLATION
A.
Install surface metal raceway at locations indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Use flat-head screws, clips, and straps to fasten raceway channel to surfaces.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 10
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
C.
3.7
07/09/10
Mount plumb and level.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust flush-mounted outlets to make front flush with finished floor, wall, or ceiling material.
B.
Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes.
3.8
CLEANING
A.
Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.
B.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Repair damage to paint or PVC finishes with matching touch-up coating recommended by the
manufacturer.
3.9
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
3.10
Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings and finishes are without damage
or deterioration at final inspection.
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except
where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.
B.
Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install
horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C.
Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D.
Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
E.
Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
F.
Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
1.
2.
3.
H.
Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where
at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.
Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.
Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above
the floor.
Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect
conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 11
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
07/09/10
I.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than
200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 24 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.
J.
Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed
sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover
plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the
following points:
1.
2.
K.
Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.
Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
Expansion-Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located where
environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25
feet.
1.
Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and quantity
of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
L.
3.11
A.
Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.
Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.
Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F
temperature change.
Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.
Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length
of straight run per deg F of temperature change.
Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according
to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the time of installation.
Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and
install box flush with surface of wall.
INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
Direct-Buried Conduit:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom
as specified for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.
Install backfill as specified.
After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of
conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as
temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide
maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished
grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal
compaction as specified.
Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances
through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout the
length of the elbow.
Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at
building entrances through the floor.
a.
Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling
with 3 inches of concrete.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 12
NORTH JETTY BEACH PARK
STORAGE PAVILION
SARASOTA COUNTY
b.
6.
07/09/10
For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit
horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install
insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried conduits,
placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of conduit.
END OF SECTION
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 13
This page left intentionally blank